wt
Smithsonian Institution
Office of Engineering Design & Construction
SPECIFICATIONS
PROJECT NO.:
1233106
PROJECT TITLE: Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components
FACILITY:
Smithsonian National Zoological Park Visitor Center
DATE:
SUBMISSION:
6 August 2013
Final Documents
This project is approved as being in conformance with applicable provisions of the Smithsonian Directive
(SD) 410.
Michael J. Carrancho, P.E., Associate Director
600 Maryland Avenue, S.W.
Suite 5001
Washington, D.C. 20024
Voice: 202.633.6230 Fax: 202.633.6233
Date
USPS Mail:
OEDC Capital Gallery
MRC 511
P.O. Box 37012
Washington, D.C. 20013-7012
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Design Narrative-Final Construction Document
-6 August 2013
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION #
TITLE AND DESCRIPTION
DIVISION 1:
PROJECT SUMMARY AND INFORMATION
1. Project Information
2. Summary of Work
3. Contract Time for Completion
4. Bidder/Offer or Examination of Site
5. Availability of Documents
6. Insurance
SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
7. Units of Measure
8. Non-Public, Tenant, and Secured Spaces
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
9. Hours of Work, Workdays, and Government Holidays
10. Conditions Affecting Contractor’s Work
11. Deliveries, Hauling, and Access
12. Dress and Deportment
13. Contractor Parking
14. Eating, Drinking, Smoking, and Illegal Substance Use
PROJECT COORDINATION
15. Coordination of Trades
16. Quality Control
17. Codes
18. Permits, Licenses, and Fees
19. Utility Service Interruptions and New Connections
20. Cutting, Patching, and Matching Existing Work
PROTECTION OF THE SITE DURING CONSTRUCTION
21. Protection of the Site
22. Protection of Flora and Fauna
23. Debris Control and Daily Cleanup
24. Dust and Air Quality Control
25. Noise Control
26. Vermin, Pest, and Rodent Control
27. Drilling, Welding, and Cutting
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
28. Staging, Storage, and Work Areas
29. Sanitary/Toilet Facilities
30. Water and Electricity Availability
31. Project Signs
MEETINGS
32. Preconstruction Meeting
REMARKS
33. Pre-Condition Survey of the Site
34. Project Meetings
SUBMISSIONS
35. Submittal Definitions
36. Submittals and Reviews
37. Criteria for Product Selection
38. Contractor Correspondence and Daily Reports
SAFETY, HEALTH, AND FIRE PROTECTION
39. Job-Site Safety
40. Toxic and Hazardous Substances
41. Personal Protective Equipment
42. Barriers, Barricades, and Walkways
43. Existing Fire Protection Systems
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
44. General Security Requirements
45. Identification Badges
46. Security of Temporary Openings
47. Existing Building Alarm System
48. NZP Police Officer Duty Charges
SCHEDULES AND PAYMENTS
49. Schedule of Values
50. Scheduling & Payments/Critical Path Method
51. Assignment of Claims
PROJECT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
52. Project Closeout
53. Substantial Completion
54. Final Completion and Acceptance
Division 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Division 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 8413
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
Division 23 - HEATING, VENTIALTION, AND AIR CONDITIONING.(HVAC)
23 0500
23 0513
23 0523
23 0529
23 0548
23 0553
23 0593
4.0 - APPENDIX
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Design Narrative-Final Construction Document
-6 August 2013
23 0700
23 0900
23 2321
23 3113
23 3300
23 3713
23 7313
MECHANICAL INSULATION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
HYDRONIC PIPING
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
MODULAR INDOOR AIR-HANDLING UNITS
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 0513
26 0519
26 0529
26 0533
26 0553
26 0572
26 0573
26 0574
26 1116
26 2413
26 2416
26 2713
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLE
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
INDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
SWITCHBOARDS
PANELBOARDS
ELECTRICITY METERING
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
31 2000
EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 9300
PLANTS
DIVISION 33 UTILITY
33 0523.13
HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01000 -- SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
PROJECT SUMMARY AND INFORMATION
1.
PROJECT INFORMATION
1.1.
OFEO/NZP Project No. 1233106
National Zoological Park]
3001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. 20008
1.2.
Smithsonian Institution
Contracting Officer
Office of Contracting
MRC 1200
P.O. Box 37012
Washington, D.C.
20013-7012
1.3.
Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR)
Mr. Mark Muller
Smithsonian Institution
National Zoological Park
General Services and Parking Building, Level 1
Resident Engineer’s Office
3001 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Washington, D.C. 20008
Telephone No. 202-633-4217
2.
SUMMARY OF WORK
Contractor is to remove and replace the transformer in the Electrical Room in the basement of the Visitor
Center. New panel boards will be provided on First and Second floor of the building. A new direct buried
2" conduit will be provided from the existing cable vault to the Guard House by Horizontal Directional
Drilling through the landscaped area in front of the Visitor Center to minimize the impact on the
vegetation.
To mitigate the increased heat load in the Electrical Room, one of the ceiling hung HVAC unit will be
replace with a short duct chase.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 1 of 31
3.
CONTRACT TIME FOR COMPLETION
3.1.
Work under this contract shall begin by the Contractor within seven (7) calendar days
after the Notice to Proceed and shall be completed within the total contract time of 167 calendar
days. All work, including inspections, testing, correction of deficiencies, and project close-out
activities, shall be completed in every respect within the contract time.
3.2
The start date and completion date shall be as stated in the Notice to Proceed issued by
the Contracting Officer.
4.
BIDDER EXAMINATION OF SITE
4.1.
Every effort has been made to indicate all work necessary to complete the project as
identified. All bidders shall carefully examine the premises during the bid period and satisfy
themselves as to the extent, nature, and location of the work, general and local conditions,
particularly those bearing on transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials,
availability of labor, water, electric power, access routes, uncertainties of the weather, type of
equipment and facilities needed for the successful execution of the Work.
4.2
Pre-Bid Conference and Site Visit. Before the bid opening date, the Contracting
Representative will announce a scheduled pre-bid conference and site visit. The purpose of the
scheduled meeting is to provide an opportunity for all bidders to review the project site. Any
comments, information or discussion during the site visit shall not modify the contract documents.
5.
AVAILABILITY OF DOCUMENTS
5.1.
One set of the solicitation documents are available, at no cost to the bidder, from the
Contracting Officer.
6.
INSURANCE
6.1.
The Contractor shall submit all insurance information indicated in the Construction
Contract Clauses in the Indefinite Delivery Indefinite Quantity (IDIQ) agreement.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 2 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
7.
UNITS OF MEASURE
7.1.
All fabrication and installation shall be performed in accordance with the units of measure
given in the Contract Documents.
8.
NON-PUBLIC, TENANT AND SECURED SPACES
8.1.
Certain tenant spaces, non-public spaces, utility and equipment rooms, and other areas
related to or used for purposes of storage, conservation, research, curation of Zoo collection and
artifacts or for scientific research may have restricted access.
8.2.
The Contractor shall identify to the COTR as soon as possible, but no less than two
working days in advance, any occupied areas that the Contractor must access that are located
outside the limits of the project site. The Contractor shall identify in writing:
8.2.1.
Restricted areas to be accessed.
8.2.2.
Specific reason for needing access.
8.2.3.
Nature of the work to be performed.
8.2.4.
Date(s) and hours needed to complete construction work activity.
CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
9.
HOURS OF WORK, WORKDAYS, AND GOVERNMENT HOLIDAYS
9.1.
Work shall be performed under this contract during the normal workdays of Monday
through Friday, except Smithsonian holidays as specified herein, and the normal work hours of
6:00 a.m. to 2:30 p.m.
9.2.
The premises will be continually occupied, requiring that certain work under this contract
may need to be performed during periods other than that specified above. All shutdowns and
outages must be approved by and coordinated with the COTR and occur between the hours of
6:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m., unless otherwise approved.
9.3.
For each occasion the Contractor intends to work on Saturdays, Sundays or Smithsonian
holidays, or during hours other than those indicated above, the Contractor shall obtain special
written permission from the COTR for each occasion, at least 24 hours in advance.
9.3.
The Contractor shall reimburse the Smithsonian Institution for security and inspection
services provided by the Zoo when the Contractor chooses to work outside the normal workdays
and hours, as identified herein. However, the Contractor will not be charged for Zoo overtime
security and inspection services, if in the opinion of the COTR, the work cannot be done during
the normal workdays and hours due to requirements of the Smithsonian.
9.4.
Smithsonian Holidays. For holidays that fall on Saturday, the Smithsonian holiday is
observed on the previous Friday. For holidays that fall on Sunday, the Smithsonian holiday is
observed on the following Monday. The Smithsonian holidays are listed below.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 3 of 31
New Year's Day
Martin Luther King Jr.'s Birthday
George Washington's Birthday
Memorial Day
Independence Day
Labor Day
Columbus Day
Veterans' Day
Thanksgiving Day
Christmas Day
10.
January 1
January, third Monday
February, third Monday
May, last Monday
July 4
September, first Monday
October, second Monday
November 11
November, fourth Thursday
December 25
CONDITIONS AFFECTING CONTRACTOR'S WORK
10.1. Existing Occupied Spaces: The Visitor Center building will be occupied by staff and
visitors during the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall schedule demolition and
construction operations with the COTR to minimize interference with the Zoo’s operation, and
nearby neighbors.
11.
DELIVERIES, HAULING, AND ACCESS
11.1. Normal deliveries shall be made between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 11:00 a.m. The
Contractor's materials and equipment shall be delivered, received, receipted for and handled by
the Contractor's personnel. Access to the site for on or off loading of all material, structures and
equipment shall be designated by the COTR.
12.
DRESS AND DEPORTMENT
12.1. All Contractors' personnel shall be fully and appropriately clothed at all times and shall
conduct themselves in a manner appropriate to a public place. The COTR may require removal
of any individual from the premises and project for unacceptable dress, demeanor, or disruptive
conduct, if the Contractor superintendent fails to correct conditions in violation of this paragraph.
12.2
The Government reserves the right to exclude or remove from the site or building any
employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor as the Government deems incompetent, careless,
insubordinate, or otherwise objectionable, or whose continued employment of the work is deemed
by the Government to be contrary to public interest.
13.
CONTRACTOR PARKING
13.1. Parking spaces may be assigned to the contractor as near as practical to the staging
area. These spaces are for use during the contract period.
13.2. The assigned spaces may only be used by company vehicles. Vehicles must be clearly
marked with the company name and/or logo. Vehicles not in compliance with this section are
subject to ticketing and towing by the National Zoo police. Costs associated with parking
violations shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
13.3. Parking spaces will not be provided for the Contractor’s employees. Employees will be
required to comply with the National Zoo’s pay parking regulations.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 4 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
14.
EATING, DRINKING, SMOKING, AND ILLEGAL SUBSTANCE ABUSE
14.1. Eating and drinking in Smithsonian buildings or leased space will be allowed only in
designated areas. Offenders may be subject to removal from the premises and project should
the Contractor's Superintendent fail to correct conditions, which, in the opinion of the COTR,
violate this clause.
14.2. The consumption of alcoholic beverages by the Contractor's personnel is prohibited in all
Smithsonian buildings or leased space.
14.3. Smoking or carrying lighted tobacco products is prohibited in all Smithsonian buildings or
leased space, in exhibition and public spaces, in areas where hazardous materials are stored or
handled, and in areas undergoing construction, renovation, or repair. Acceptable areas for
smoking are outside of the building, as designated by the Smithsonian Facility Manager, and/or
Office of Safety and Environmental Management (OSEM).
14.4. The possession, sale and/or use of narcotic or other illegal substances or firearms by
Contractor employees is strictly prohibited in all Smithsonian facilities and leased space. Working
on the project under the influence of alcohol or illegal substances is strictly prohibited.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 5 of 31
PROJECT COORDINATION
15.
COORDINATION OF TRADES
15.1. The Contractor shall coordinate work of different trades so that interference between
mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work, including existing services, will be
avoided.
15.2. Where work by separate entities requires off-site fabrication of products and accurate
interfacing of materials to produce the required results, the Contractor shall prepare coordination
drawings to indicate how work shown on separate shop drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed,
and sequenced for installation. Coordination drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the
requirements of the "Submissions" section.
15.2.1. Work installed prior to approval of coordination drawings shall be at the
Contractor's risk. Subsequent relocations required to avoid interferences shall be made
without additional expense to the Smithsonian. If interference develops, the COTR will
decide which work shall be relocated, regardless of which was installed first.
15.3. Installation of equipment and systems shall allow the maximum practical space for
operation, repair, removal, and testing, within the limits indicated on the Contract Documents.
Pipes, conduit, ducts, and other system components shall be installed as close as possible to
ceiling slabs, walls, and columns to minimize space used while accommodating function and
maintenance.
16.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
16.1. The Contractor shall provide for quality control, inspections, testing, and re-testing as
necessary for all work, including that of subcontractors, to assure compliance with the contract
documents.
16.2.
Critical components of the project that require special attention include:
16.2.1. Scheduling of utility shutdowns during construction.
17.
CODES
17.1
18.
All work must be compliant in accordance with all applicable codes.
PERMITS, LICENSES, & FEES
18.1. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all applicable permits and licenses required by
D.C. regulating agencies.
18.2. The Contractor shall pay all duties, fees, taxes, and other charges and give all notices
necessary and incidental to the due and lawful execution of the work.
18.3. The Contractor shall keep the Smithsonian indemnified against all penalties and liability
for breach of provisions of any national, provincial, district or city statute, ordinance, or law and
the regulations and by-laws of any local or other duly constituted authority which may be
applicable to the Work and with such rules and regulations of public bodies and companies.
18.4. Accessibility for Physically-Disabled Persons. The Contractor's shall provide temporary
constructions at the site as necessary to maintain access for physically disabled persons. All
provisions for temporary access shall be subject to the approval of the COTR.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 6 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
19.
UTILITY SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS AND NEW CONNECTIONS
19.1. Any planned interruption in utility service must be approved by and coordinated through
the COTR. The Contractor shall submit a written request as far in advance of scheduled
interruption as possible, but no less than two full working days in advance. The Contractor shall
make the necessary temporary provisions to supply continuous electrical power, HVAC space
conditioning, and security as required during periods when service is interrupted.
19.2.
Work shall be coordinated to minimize the number and duration of outages.
19.3
All planned shutdowns and outages must occur between the hours of 6:00 p.m. to 6:00
a.m., unless otherwise approved by the COTR.
19.4. The Contractor's work efforts to restore service shall be continuous until the interrupted
utility is back in service.
20.
CUTTING, PATCHING, AND MATCHING EXISTING WORK
20.1. Existing work shall be cut, drilled, altered, removed, or temporarily removed and replaced
as necessary for performance of work under the contract. Work that is replaced shall match
similar existing work. Structural members shall not be cut or altered, except where noted on
drawings, without authorization of the COTR. Work to remain in place that is damaged or
defaced during this contract shall be restored to match the conditions existing at the time of
award of the contract, at no additional cost to the Smithsonian.
20.2. Conditions exposed by removal of existing work that do not match new finishes or align
with new work shall be called to the COTR's immediate attention. Necessary corrective work
directed by the COTR will be subject to adjustment provisions as stated in the General Conditions
of the contract.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 7 of 31
PROTECTION OF THE SITE DURING CONSTRUCTION
21.
PROTECTION OF THE SITE
21.1. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection for all parts of the building, including
interior and exterior surfaces, its occupants and contents, and grounds wherever work under this
contract is performed.
21.2. Plan for Protection of the Site: The Contractor shall submit a plan for protection of the
site to the COTR for approval. As a minimum, the Plan shall describe:
21.2.1. Proposed method, location, and construction of temporary enclosures.
21.2.2. Routes of access and egress, including those for people with disabilities.
21.2.3. Location and maintenance of emergency exits.
21.2.4. Methods of protection of existing surfaces and occupants.
21.2.5. Means of connection of temporary enclosures/surfaces to existing historic
materials.
21.3. Temporary enclosures shall be constructed to prevent unauthorized access or egress.
Dust and fume barriers shall be constructed, as needed or as determined by the COTR, to seal
and isolate the work area from the remainder of the interior areas while the work is in progress.
Wood used for protection of the site shall be fire-treated.
21.4. The Contractor shall submit information describing the proposed construction of
temporary enclosures and methods of installation to the COTR for approval. Any connections to
existing structures must be accomplished in such a way as to minimize disturbance of existing
surfaces.
22.
PROTECTION OF FLORA AND FAUNA
22.1. Flora Protection: The Contractor is expressly prohibited from collecting plant materials
on Smithsonian property.
22.2. The Contractor shall not store materials inside the drip-line of trees or shrubs. Prior to
the start of the work on site, the Contractor shall surround trees within the project site and
adjacent areas with a protective fence ("snow fence"), 1.4 m high (minimum), 300 mm outside the
drip line (minimum). The protective fencing shall be constructed of heavy-duty metal posts or
pressure-treated 100 mm X 100 mm wooden posts, 1 m on center, with a top and bottom stringer
of 50 mm X 100 mm members. The fencing fabric shall consist of 40 mm X 13 mm slats,
pressure-treated.
22.3. Vehicular traffic inside the drip-line of trees, on turf areas, or on flower beds is not
permitted without prior approval of the National Zoo’s Department of Horticulture through the
COTR. If flower beds must be crossed by vehicles, beds shall be bridged using 100 mm thick
timbers to help prevent compaction of the soil in the flower beds. The Contractor must first plank
any turf area used for parking.
22.4. Where aerial work is being performed above shrub/flower beds, the Contractor shall
protect them with an approved protective framework installed at least 300 mm above the tops of
the plant materials. The Contractor shall submit the proposed method of protection to the COTR
for approval. Trees and shrubs shall only be tied back with the approval of the COTR.
22.5. Any damage to the existing irrigation systems during construction shall be repaired by the
Contractor within two calendar days of when the damage occurred. The Contractor shall bear all
costs for repairs to the irrigation systems and for replacement of damaged plant materials.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 8 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
Replaced plant materials shall meet the criteria established by the National Zoo’s Department of
Horticulture.
22.6. Plant material removed by the Contractor for re-use shall be balled, bagged, and
protected in accordance with instructions prepared by the Smithsonian Office of Horticulture.
22.7. Turf areas damaged during construction shall be repaired by the Contractor by roto-tilling
a minimum depth of 6 inches, backfilling with sandy-loam topsoil and installing certified Kentucky
Bluegrass sod, consisting of a minimum of three varieties of Kentucky Bluegrass, a minimum of
one year old. The Contractor shall bear all costs for these repairs.
22.8. The Contractor shall be responsible for the daily removal of trash and construction debris
from turf and flower/shrub beds within the limits of construction.
22.9. Any plant material destroyed and/or damaged by the Contractor during construction shall
be replaced with like genus and species of the same size, at no additional cost to the
Smithsonian. The damaged plant materials must be replaced prior to final payment.
22.10. Any construction scaffolding on planted beds must be coordinated with the Smithsonian's
Horticultural Services division through the COTR to ensure that its installation will not damage or
destroy existing plant materials or turf area or interfere with daily maintenance of the grounds.
23.
DEBRIS CONTROL AND DAILY CLEANUP
23.1. The Contractor shall regularly clean up the work areas and shall at all times maintain the
project in as neat and orderly a manner as is consistent with normal operations. Debris resulting
from construction operations shall be removed from the site daily by the Contractor in such a
manner as to prevent spillage on streets or adjacent areas. The Contractor shall keep all access,
haul routes, and site areas free of dirt, debris, and other materials resulting from construction
activities.
23.2. Under no circumstances shall any rubbish or waste be dropped or thrown from one level
of scaffolding to another or within or outside the building. Rubbish may be lowered by way of
chutes, taken down on hoists, or lowered in receptacles.
23.3
In addition to a general daily clean-up and removal of rubbish, the Contractor shall
immediately prior to final inspection for completion and acceptance, or when directed by the
COTR, have all surfaces swept and dusted, and all finished surfaces washed and in a new
appearing condition with all stains, soil marks, dirt and other forms of defacement removed.
23.3. Trash receptacles: The Contractor shall provide enclosed trash receptacle(s) in
quantity and size necessary to meet project needs, located as approved by the COTR.
23.4 All food and food wrappings brought on the premises must be properly disposed of in
approved containers that are secured from animals and pest.
24.
DUST AND AIR QUALITY CONTROL
24.1. The Contractor will execute the Work by methods that minimize dust raised by
construction operations. The Contractor will provide positive means to prevent objectionable
odors and air-borne dust from dispersing into the atmosphere and from being drawn into existing
air-intake louvers and ductwork.
24.2. Dust barriers shall be erected where necessary to protect adjacent areas from dust
infiltration as required by the COTR. Dust barriers shall be rigid and visually opaque and shall
seal the work area by affixing to the structure on all sides (i.e. ceiling, walls, and floor).
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 9 of 31
24.3. Means of connection of dust barriers to existing structures shall not damage the building
fabric. Details of barriers shall be submitted for approval to the COTR.
24.4.
25.
No open fires or burning of trash are permitted.
NOISE CONTROL
25.1. The Contractor shall comply with the regulations of the District of Columbia and OSHA
Standard 1926.52 and 1910.95 and all other regulations relative to safety noise control.
25.2. Activities that generate excessive noise or vibration and interrupt Zoo functions or create
public disturbances may be required to be performed during off-hours at the discretion of the
COTR.
25.3. The Contractor shall provide sound attenuation to maintain acoustic level below 75 dBA
at a distance of 15 m.
26.
VERMIN, PEST, AND RODENT CONTROL
26.1. The Contractor shall use non-chemical means and practices, which deter or prevent the
introduction of pests into the project site or premises.
27.
DRILLING, WELDING, AND CUTTING
27.1. Daily Permit: When welding, torch cutting, or other heating operations are to occur inside
existing structures, the Contractor shall obtain a daily welding permit from the COTR at least two
working days in advance. The permit must be posted at the job site prior to beginning the
scheduled work.
27.2. Fire Watch: No welding or torch cutting shall be performed unless adequate fire
protection is provided. The Contractor shall maintain a fire watch for the duration of welding,
cutting, and heating operations and for at least 30 minutes after the 'hot' work has stopped. The
Contractor shall provide adequate ventilation to prevent air contamination or the accumulation of
toxic materials. A fire extinguisher (minimum 10 pounds, dry-chemical type, typical) shall be on
hand when drilling, welding, or cutting.
27.3. Use of Impact Hammers:
The use of impact hammers or other equipment causing
vibration, noise, and dust may be harmful to Zoo animals and/or building occupants. The
Contractor shall request approval from the COTR at least five working days before beginning this
type of work.
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
28.
STAGING, STORAGE, AND WORK AREAS
28.1
Staging and Storage Areas: The Contractor shall coordinate with the COTR the use of
any area proposed for staging and storage of materials and equipment at least five working days
prior to mobilization or at the Preconstruction Meeting, whichever is first.
28.2
The Contractor shall provide adequate storage and protection of materials and equipment
delivered to the site to prevent theft, weather damage, or other physical damage. The site shall
be maintained in a neat and orderly manner as to further minimize hazards to personnel, animals,
visitors, materials and equipment.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 10 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
28.3. All wood used for temporary, interior construction shall be pressure-impregnated with a
"Dricon" treatment or an equal treatment approved by the Smithsonian Institution AND Zoo. All
pieces must bear the UL "FR-S" stamp. Intumescent (fire-retardant) paint shall not be used.
28.4. Fencing:
The Contractor shall install a standard chain-link construction fence to
define the temporary work limits for construction around exterior staging, storage, and work areas
at no additional cost to the Smithsonian. Green tennis netting is required to all areas visible to the
public.
29.
SANITARY/TOILET FACILITIES
29.1. Contractors' personnel will be permitted to use designated public toilet rooms on the
premises, subject to the regulations and control of the COTR.
30.
WATER AND ELECTRICITY AVAILABILITY
30.1
Water and electricity are available on the premises. Use must be coordinated with the
COTR.
31.
PROJECT SIGNS
31.1. Construction Site Information and Direction: Informational signs required to indicate the
location of the Contractor's office and directional signs for safety, vehicular control, pedestrian
right-of-ways, detours to facilities, etc. shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor as
requested and approved by the COTR.
MEETINGS
32.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
32.1. A Preconstruction Conference will be scheduled for the project with the Contractor before
any work is started at the site. As soon as possible after the Date of Award, the COTR will
contact the Contractor to arrange a time, date, and place for the conference. Items to be
discussed at the Preconstruction Meeting include, but not are limited to:
32.1.1. Contract Time: Notice to Proceed date and Completion date
32.1.2. Scheduling and Submittals
32.1.2.1. Progress Schedule
32.1.2.2. Payment Breakdown Schedule
32.1.2.3. Required Submittals
32.1.3. Sequence of Construction
32.1.4. Mobilization and Staging Area for Materials and Equipment
32.1.5. Access to the Premises, Haul Routes, Loading Areas
32.1.6. Contractor Deliveries
32.1.7. Security Requirements/List of Contractor's Personnel
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 11 of 31
32.1.8. Emergency Procedures and Phone Numbers
32.1.9. Protection of Premises
32.1.10. Fire Protection, Safety and Health Requirements
32.1.11. Utility Interruptions, Rough-in Inspections, Testing
32.1.12. Applications for Payment
32.1.13. Pre-Condition Survey of the Site
32.1.14. Accessibility Requirements
32.1.15. Quality Assurance and Inspection of the Contract Work
32.2. All of the Contractor's staff and Subcontractors or Suppliers whose presence is
necessary or requested by the COTR shall attend the Preconstruction Meeting.
32.3. Coordination Plan: The Contractor shall use the Preconstruction Conference to develop
a Coordination Plan for interaction with other parties working in or using the facility. The plan
shall be submitted no less than five working days after the Preconstruction Conference, and shall
address interactions with other contractors, tenants, the public, and any others making use of the
site and surrounding areas. As a minimum it shall include:
32.3.1. Locations of overlap in use of the site by the Contractor and others, including
work areas, delivery points, access/egress areas.
32.3.2. Specific items of work by others required to support critical milestones in the
Contractor's schedule.
33.3.3. Completion or delivery of work by others that may impact the Contractor's
schedule.
33.3.4. Portions of the work that create special hazards or disturbances.
33.3.5. Portions of the work that affect utilities, fire-protection or detection systems, or
security systems.
33.3.6. Events requiring access to areas outside of the project site or secured spaces.
33.3.7. Protection to be provided by the Contractor for work completed by others either
before or during this project.
33.
PRE-CONDITION SURVEY OF THE SITE
33.1. After the Preconstruction Meeting and before the start of work on the site, the project site
(i.e. buildings, yards, and their contents, grounds, and equipment) shall be inspected by the
Contractor, major Subcontractors, COTR, and other National Zoo personnel as may be required
for the purpose of verification of the existing conditions. Any damages or defective equipment will
be noted at this time, and this survey will serve as the basis for the establishment of the preconstruction conditions. The identification of pre-construction conditions will be jointly established
by the Contractor and Smithsonian Institution.
33.2
Any damage to the buildings, yards, their contents, grounds, or equipment that occurs
during the contract period, unless noted as existing during the inspection as specified above shall
be repaired to its pre-contract condition by the Contractor at no cost to the National Zoological
Park. The COTR will determine the adequacy of the repairs as required in the previous
paragraph.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 12 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
34.
PROJECT MEETINGS
34.1. Progress Meetings: The COTR will lead regular progress meetings with representatives
of the Contractor, Smithsonian, Architect/Engineer (as required), major subcontractors, and other
critical subcontractors and suppliers. The purposes of these meetings are to expedite the work,
coordinate and schedule the Work, and coordinate the work with Smithsonian activities. Progress
meetings shall be held weekly unless otherwise directed by the COTR. The time and place of the
meetings will be established at the Preconstruction Meeting. The Contractor shall insure that all
required subcontractors and suppliers attend the Progress Meetings and the COTR will insure
that all necessary SI personnel attend.
34.2. Special-Topic Meetings: At the discretion of the COTR, separate meetings may be
scheduled to address issues of quality assurance, coordination with other contractors on the
premises, coordination with other agencies, scheduling of the work, application for payments, etc.
The Contractor's staff and Subcontractors or Suppliers whose presence is necessary or
requested by the COTR shall attend.
34.3. Meeting Minutes: The Contractor shall promptly prepare minutes of each meeting and
send two copies to the COTR within five working days.
SUBMISSIONS
35.
SUBMITTAL DEFINITIONS
35.1. Submittals are defined to include shop drawings, product data, samples, and additional
data required for submission to the COTR for review and approval prior to incorporation into the
work.
35.1.1. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings, schedules, diagrams, and illustrations
prepared specifically for this project by the Contractor, or any subcontractor,
manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate fabrication and/or installation of a portion
of the Work.
35.1.2. Schedule: A detailed tabulation of components, items, or parts to be furnished
for use on this project.
35.1.3. Statement: An affirmation prepared by the Contractor, the installer, or
manufacturer of a material, product, or system, to satisfy a requirement defined in a
technical section.
35.1.4. Factory Test Report: A written report of the findings of a test performed by the
Contractor on an actual portion of the Work or prototype prepared for this project before it
is shipped to the site.
35.1.5. Field Test Report: A written report of the findings of a test performed by the
Contractor on a portion of the Work during or after installation.
35.1.6. Certificate of Compliance: A written statement, signed by an authorized official
of the manufacturer of a product or system or supplier of a material attesting that the
product, system, or material meets the requirements of the contract documents. The
certificate of compliance must be dated after the award of this Contract, and must name
the project and cite the specification section, paragraph, and requirements that it is
intended to address.
35.1.7. Product Data: Illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,
instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, and catalog
information illustrating a material, product, or system to be installed on this project.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 13 of 31
35.1.8. Color Charts: Pre-printed brochures showing the color range of a material.
35.1.9. Test Reports: Reports verifying that a material, assembly, system, process, or
laboratory meets requirements established in the Contract Documents. Reports shall
indicate compliance by naming and describing the test method and test results. Testing
must have occurred within three years of the date of award of this contract.
35.1.10. Samples: Physical examples of materials, equipment, assemblies, or
workmanship establishing standards for evaluating finished Work.
35.1.11. Color/Texture Selection Sample: Samples of an available range of textures
and/or colors of a material formed of the actual finish material over a substrate identical
to that which will be used in the field.
35.1.12. Mock-up: An assembly or sample panel constructed in accordance with
specifications to show construction details, finished appearance, and/or performance.
35.1.13 Material Safety Data Sheets: Instructions, warnings, and recommended and
required handling and use procedures for individual hazardous materials published by the
product manufacturer.
36.
SUBMITTALS AND REVIEWS
36.1
Contractor Responsibility for Submittals: The Contractor shall provide all required
submittals, by technical specification section, in accordance with the contract documents at least
two (2) weeks before their expected use. All samples require written approval by the COTR prior
to use on the job. Samples will be returned to the Contractor and, if approved, may be used in
the work.
36.2
The Contractor shall clearly indicate on the submittal that it has been reviewed by the
Contractor and found to meet the project requirements. Any items submitted as substitutions
shall be clearly identified as such on the submittal and the transmittal document. If shop
drawings show variations from the contract documents because of standard shop practices or for
other reasons, the Contractor shall provide a separate, written description of variations along with
the submittal. The Contractor shall:
36.2.1. Review each submittal for conformance with requirements of the contract
documents and coordination with related work.
36.2.2. Determine and verify all field measurements, required material quantities, method
of assembly or erection, installation requirements, and proper connection to adjoining
materials installed by others.
36.2.3. Assure that all submittals use the appropriate units of measure. All drawings and
technical data shall be in units of measure given in the Contract Document. Preprinted
literature in other units shall be accompanied by documentation to show conformance to
project requirements.
36.2.4. Transmit all required submittals for a technical specification section at the same
time unless prior written waiver of this requirement has been provided by the COTR.
36.2.5. Transmit submittals to the COTR in a logical and orderly sequence in accordance
with the Submittal Schedule to prevent project delays or adversely impact work by the
Smithsonian Institution or other contractors.
36.2.6. Correct and resubmit submittals according to response from Smithsonian Office
of Engineering Design & Construction.
36.2.7. Commence work on items requiring submittals only after all related submittals are
reviewed and approved by the Smithsonian. All Work shall conform to approved
submittals.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 14 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
36.3. Submittal Schedule and Control Log: The Contractor shall submit to the COTR a
schedule of work-related submittals using the Smithsonian OFEO Submittal Log form within 14
calendar days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed. (Submittal Log form is available
on computer disk upon request.) Submittals shall be listed in the order they are scheduled to be
submitted and the following information shall be given:
36.3.1. Project Name, Project Number, Contractor Name, Contract Number
36.3.2. Technical Specification Section for each submittal
36.3.3. Unique Submittal Number
36.3.4. Description of item to be submitted, as listed in the specifications
36.3.5. Date item must be submitted to the Smithsonian in order to support the project
schedule.
36.3.6. Subcontractor providing submittal (in "Comments" column)
36.4. Quantities for Submittals: Unless otherwise noted in the technical specification, the
Contractor shall deliver to the COTR:
36.4.1. Shop Drawings: Submit one reproducible and eight black line prints. After
submittal review, three prints and the reproducible will be returned to the Contractor.
36.4.2. Product Data, Test Reports, Color Charts, etc.: Submit eight copies of each
submittal. After submittal review, three copies will be returned to the Contractor.
36.4.3. Color/Texture Samples: Submit two samples, minimum size 24"by 24" unless
otherwise specified. After submittal review, the Smithsonian may retain one sample.
36.4.4. Mock-up and Sample Installations: Unless otherwise specified, minimum size
shall be as noted to complete a panel section or normal break in the work.
36.4.5. Written Text Documents, Plans, and Reports: Submit eight copies, each copy
with complete attachments, if any.
36.5. Submittal Reviews by the Smithsonian: Reviewed submittals will be marked "Approved",
"Approved as Noted", "Resubmit", or "Disapproved". Submittal approval by the Smithsonian shall
not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for submittal errors, omissions, or deviations from the
contract documents. Approval of submissions does not constitute acceptance of substitutions
except as covered under sub-paragraph entitled "Contract Requests for Substitutions".
36.6. Construction Progress Schedule Submittal: The Contractor shall submit a progress
schedule within one (1) calendar day from the date of the Notice to Proceed. No work shall start
at the site until the progress schedule has been approved by the COTR. The schedule shall
provide a weekly breakdown of activity including interaction between trades and be subdivided in
accordance with items of work or areas of the job where the work is to take place. The schedule
shall also list equipment, special devices, hardware, products or other items requiring long lead
time, when these items are ordered and the projected delivery dates. The last week of the
schedule shall reflect final inspection, testing, and the correction of deficiencies.
36.7. Submittal Review Period: The Contractor shall transmit to the COTR all submittals
sufficiently in advance of the time necessary for fabrication and installation to allow for review by
the Smithsonian and return to the Contractor, including any time needed for correction and
resubmission by the Contractor. The expected time required by the Smithsonian for review of
initial submission is 14 calendar days. No extension of the Contract Time will be granted for the
Contractor's failure to allow sufficient time for review and processing, including resubmission of
items that were initially rejected due to improper submission or non-compliance with the Contract
Documents.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 15 of 31
36.8. Contractor Requests for Substitutions: Contractor requests for items identified by
manufacturer, brand name, make, catalog number, etc. in the contract documents shall be
submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to contract award, in accordance with the
General Conditions. After award of the contract, contractor requests for substitutions may be
considered and accepted by the Smithsonian at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.
37.
CRITERIA FOR PRODUCT SELECTION
37.1. To the greatest extent possible, subject to the restrictions of the Buy American Act,
provide products, materials, or equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source. Where
more than one choice of a product or material is available for Contractor's selection, select an
option that is compatible with other products and materials already selected.
37.2. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices
and details needed for complete installation for intended use and effect.
37.3. Products that, by nature of their application, are likely to be needed at a later date for
maintenance and repair or replacement work, shall be current models for which replacement
parts are available.
37.4.
Product selection shall be done in accordance with the following requirements:
37.4.1. Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Select from among products that are in
compliance with the project requirements, as well as with construction standards and all
applicable codes and regulations.
37.4.2. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with specific
performances indicated and are recommended by the manufacturer (in published product
literature or by individual certification) for the application indicated.
37.4.3. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products that have been produced in
accordance with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components,
and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finishing,
testing, and other operations in the manufacturing process.
37.4.4. Visual Matching: Where matching with an established sample for color, pattern,
and/or texture, the COTR shall determine whether a proposed product matches the
sample.
38.
CONTRACTOR CORRESPONDENCE AND DAILY REPORTS
38.1. The Contractor shall correspond with the COTR for all matters related to this construction
project, unless otherwise directed. All correspondence shall be signed and dated by the
Contractor and shall reference the project, project number, and contract number.
38.2. The Contractor shall maintain daily reports using the Smithsonian Institution Contractor's
Daily Report form. Reports shall be numbered consecutively and all sections shall be completed
or noted as "not applicable." Reports shall contain detailed remarks each day, including but not
limited to progress on the job, problems discovered, and discussions with Smithsonian staff.
Reports shall be submitted to the COTR each day for the previous workday.
SAFETY, HEALTH, AND FIRE PROTECTION
39.
JOB-SITE SAFETY
39.1. Safety Coordinator: The Contractor shall designate a person responsible for safety at
the project site for the duration of the project.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 16 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
39.2. Job-Site Safety Plan: The Contractor shall submit a Job-Site Safety Plan within 30
calendar days of the Contract Award and at least 10 calendar days prior to mobilization to the site
for approval by the COTR. As a minimum, the plan shall detail the procedures, designated
persons, instructions, and reports to be used to assure job-site safety for all contractors, subcontractors, Smithsonian personnel, the public, and others on the site.
39.3. Occupational Safety and Health: This contract is subject to Title 29 of the Code of
Federal Regulations, Part 1910 "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" and Part 1926
"Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health
Act (OSHA) of 1970 administered by the US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and
Health Administration. Copies of current Occupational Safety and Health Act standards are
available from regional offices of the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
39.4. Emergency Assistance: The Contractor shall post at the site telephone numbers for
reporting emergencies, including the National Zoo’s Police Station, ambulance, police, fire
department, gas utility, electric utility, water/sewer utility, poison prevention aid, and hazardouswaste handling. This information shall be posted in a conspicuous location within the project area
prior to the start of any work at the site.
39.5. Safety Signs: The Contractor shall post legible accident prevention signs in
construction areas in accordance with OSHA standards. Safety signs shall conform to ANSI
235.1 and 235.2 Vehicular traffic control devices, barricades, and signals shall conform to ANSI
D6.1.
39.6. Report of Accident or Illness: In the event of any accident or illness for which medical
assistance is required, any criminal action, or any fire, the Contractor shall notify the appropriate
authority (ambulance, police, fire Dept.), Smithsonian Security, and the COTR.
39.7. Emergency Evacuation: The Contractor shall post evacuation routes and facility
emergency/self-protection plans at the site and train all employees in emergency procedures. In
the event of a fire, the Contractor shall immediately activate the alarm at the nearest fire alarm
pull station and notify building security. Upon the activation of the audible alarm, the building will
be evacuated. No personnel shall reenter the facility until security personnel signal that the
building is safe.
39.8. Contractor Personnel to be Contacted: The Contractor shall submit a written list of
emergency telephone numbers and names of persons to contact for the General Contractor
superintendent and for each major sub-contractor working on the project site. The initial list shall
be submitted to the COTR at the Preconstruction Meeting. The list shall be updated and
resubmitted to the COTR as needed.
40.
TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
40.1. The Contractor shall submit to the COTR, at least ten working days prior to their intended
use or at the Preconstruction Conference, a written list of all toxic and hazardous substances that
will be used on the project. The Contractor shall also submit a "Material Safety Data Sheet"
similar to OSHA Form No. 20 for these substances to identify the following information:
40.1.1.
Product Identification
40.1.2.
Hazardous Ingredients
40.1.3.
Physical Data
40.1.4.
Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
40.1.5.
Health Hazard Data
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 17 of 31
40.1.6.
Emergency and First Aid Procedures
40.1.7.
Reactivity Data
40.1.8.
Spill or Leak Procedures
40.1.9.
Special Protection Information
40.1.10. Special Precautions
40.2. The Contractor shall monitor the use of all toxic and hazardous substances to ensure that
the specified Threshold Limit Values (TLV's) and/or Permissible Exposure Limits (PEL's) are not
exceeded. Any equipment or technical measures for this purpose must first be approved by the
National Zoo’s Safety Office through the COTR. Exposure of the Contractor's personnel and
Zoo’s employees and visitors to air-borne or any other physical contact with any substance shall
not exceed allowable concentrations specified in:
40.2.1. "Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices" of the American
Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists, and
40.2.2. Title 29 CFR Part 1910, Subpart Z - "Toxic and Hazardous Substances" of the
Occupational Safety and Health Standards.
40.3. Exposure of the Zoo’s animals to air-borne or any other physical contact with any toxic or
hazardous substance will be prohibited.
40.4. All toxic and hazardous substances and materials used by the Contractor must be
removed from the Zoo property upon completion of the project.
40.5. The Contractor shall provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of
soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances and pollutants produced
by construction operations. The removal of contaminated waste shall be in compliance with
applicable laws and regulations.
40.6. To achieve compliance with the requirements of this section, administration or
engineering controls shall first be implemented whenever feasible. When such controls are not
feasible to achieve full compliance, protective equipment or other protective measures shall be
used to keep exposure of all persons within the prescribed limits. Descriptions of equipment or
technical measures to be used for this purpose must be submitted to the COTR for approval. The
Contractor's requirements for compliance with all applicable local, federal, and state regulations
remain in force.
41.
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
41.1. Personal protective equipment for eyes, face, ears, nose, head, extremities, and/or full
body shall be provided, used, and maintained by the Contractor whenever necessitated by
reasons of hazards encountered in a manner capable of causing illness, injury, or impairment in
the function of any part of the body.
41.2. Persons required to use personal protective equipment shall be thoroughly trained.
Training programs shall, as a minimum, meet OSHA and EPA requirements where applicable.
The Contractor shall submit proof and criteria for employee training as requested.
42.
BARRICADES, BARRIERS, AND WALKWAYS
42.1. The Contractor shall provide safety barricades in accordance with the District of
Columbia Building Code and applicable OSHA regulations. The Contractor shall also provide
barricades, subject to approval by the COTR, to deter passage of persons and/or vehicles into
construction areas as specified or necessary.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 18 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
42.2. The Contractor shall install temporary barriers, in a manner satisfactory to the COTR, to
contain and secure the site from unauthorized entry and to minimize the adverse affects of noise
and dust generated by construction activities on surrounding areas. Barriers shall be constructed
of fire-retardant treated wood, with plastic sheeting as necessary.
42.3. If the work interferes with public or employee access to the facility or parts of the facility,
as determined by the COTR, the Contractor shall provide personnel barriers and signage to
create easily identifiable, accessible (to people with handicaps) walkways around the work. Signs
shall be posted at decision points to prevent unnecessary travel along changed routes and to
dead ends. The barriers shall be erected and dismantled in phases so that a clear route is
always available. The COTR and Contractor personnel shall have access through the barriers to
the work areas. The Contractor may use hardware on the barrier doors to prevent entry by
unauthorized persons.
42.3.1. Interior barriers shall be of standard drywall partition construction, painted, and
terminated at the underside the existing ceiling. All requirements for fire protection shall be
maintained.
42.3.2. Exterior barriers shall be of dimensional lumber and plywood, painted on both sides, and
supported to prevent overturning. Barriers shall be repainted and maintained as necessary to
remain in good condition as long as they are required.
42.4. Unless specifically indicated otherwise, barricades, barriers, and associated signs shall
be removed upon completion of the Work. The Contractor shall coordinate the dismantling and
removal with the COTR.
43.
EXISTING FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
43.1. During the course of the Work, all existing smoke and heat detectors and sprinklers
heads must remain operable. Coverings may be applied to protect them from spray coatings or
other hazardous conditions only during the actual operations. Coverings must be removed
immediately after the operations have concluded. Damaged detectors and sprinkler heads shall
be replaced immediately by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Smithsonian Institution.
The Contractor shall test replaced detectors and sprinklers after installation to the satisfaction of
the COTR. If the system cannot be made operational at the end of the day, then the Contractor
shall supply a fire watcher(s) for all after hours time.
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
44.
GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
44.1.
The Contractor and his/her employees must comply with security requirements imposed
by the National Zoo, including any necessary security clearances. Failure to inspect the site or
obtain knowledge of security regulations shall not relieve the Contractor from security
requirements or from performance of any part of the work.
44.2. Prior to the start of work on the site, the Contractor, after receiving the Notice to Proceed,
shall submit to the COTR for approval, a list of the names, social security numbers, and
addresses of all employees and subcontractor employees who will be working on the site. The
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 19 of 31
list shall identify the Prime Contractor and each subcontractor and trade. It shall be updated as
necessary to accurately identify all workers who will be working on the site during the project.
44.3. The name and telephone number of the Contractor's Superintendent and authorized
alternate individual who can be reached on a 24-hour basis shall be provided to the COTR at the
Preconstruction Meeting.
44.4
If the Contractor is required to accelerate the work in order to complete the project on
schedule, or if other conditions arise as the result of Contractor's management of the work which
required that work be accomplished during other than normal operating hours, the Contractor will
be required to assume the cost of any additional inspection and guard services at overtime rates.
44.5
Notify the COTR prior to disturbing any alarm wiring, devices, systems, etc. Planned
disturbances will be coordinated at least three (3) working days in advance of when the work is
scheduled. Any alarm wiring, devices or systems that are disturbed for any reason must be
reported to the COTR within five (5) minutes of the occurrence. The COTR will determine the
procedures for repairing the damage and who will perform the repair work. The cost of such
repairs will be borne by the Contractor.
44.6
The contractor shall provide adequate security to prevent the presence of unauthorized
persons on the work site area, and to keep doors secured when not in actual use to insure the
integrity of the barrier as well as for the property security.
45.
44.7
The Contractor is prohibited from hunting, collecting, or feeding animals on Smithsonian
property.
44.8
The Contractor is prohibited from feeding, petting or harassing any Zoo animal(s).
IDENTIFICATION BADGES
45.1. Controlled Access: Contractor employees shall sign in and out with the security officer
on a daily basis for the duration of the Contract Time. Access to the building will be granted only
to Contractor employees who sign the Building Entry and Departure Register at designated
entrances and who wear a Contractor Identification Badge or Day Pass in plain view for
inspection. Photo identification badges with serial numbers and information about allowed
access may be issued by the Smithsonian to some Contractor employees.
45.2. ID Processing: Contractor personnel will be issued identification badges for use while on
the premises.
45.2.1. ID badges will be provided by the Smithsonian at no cost to the Contractor. Smithsonian
reserves the right to not issue ID badges to those Contractor employees who fail to meet security
requirements.
45.2.2. The Contractor shall submit to the COTR a written request for approval of each employee
who will be working on site and was not on the original list. Each application must be submitted
at least five working days before the employee is scheduled to begin on the project.
45.3. ID Pickup: Contractor’s personnel reporting for work shall be required to sign the
building entry and departure register and to exchange a driver's license or some other photo
identification for the Contractor Identification Badge or Day Pass. The personal identification
exchanged for the badge or pass will only be returned to its owner when the credential is
returned.
45.4. Accountability for ID: Contractors who are issued an identification badge or day pass are
strictly accountable for it and for following established access control procedures. Misuse of the
credential, noncompliance with access control procedures, or failure to return the ID badge or day
pass upon leaving the premises shall be reported to the COTR.
45.5. Lost ID: If a Contractor or subcontractor employee loses an ID badge or day pass, the
Contractor shall report the loss immediately to the COTR. The Contractor shall submit to the
COTR, within two (2) calendar days, a written report detailing how, where, and when the
credential was lost. A request to the COTR for authorization of a replacement credential, if
Division 1: General Conditions
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Page 20 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
necessary, shall accompany this report. The Contractor shall bear the cost for replacement of the
lost badge or pass.
45.6. Ownership of ID: The Contractor Identification Badge or Day Pass shall remain the
property of the Smithsonian and it shall not be taken off the premises. The badge will be issued
to the person it identifies when he reports to the work site for duty, and it must be returned to the
security guard station whenever the person it identifies leaves the premises.
46.
SECURITY OF TEMPORARY OPENINGS
46.1. Any temporary opening in the building perimeter or between non-public and public interior
spaces must be closed and secured with means acceptable to the COTR at the end of each
workday. A clear and safe path shall be maintained at all times to allow Zoo visitors entrance into
the Zoos. The Contractor shall secure his facilities and equipment during non-working times at
his own expense. Authorized Smithsonian personnel shall have access to the work site.
47.
EXISTING BUILDING ALARM SYSTEMS
47.1. The Contractor shall notify the Building Security Control Room prior to disturbing any
alarm wiring, device, system, etc. The Contractor shall coordinate planned disturbances at least
two (2) working days in advance of the scheduled work. Any alarm wiring, devices, or system
that is broken or disturbed for any reason must be reported to the Building Security Control Room
within three (3) minutes of the occurrence.
47.2. If any system or component is damaged by Contractor employees, the Smithsonian
Institution Office of Protection Services will determine the procedures for repairing the damage to
existing building alarm systems, and who will perform the repair work. The cost to repair the
system and any related overtime costs for Smithsonian personnel shall be borne by the
Contractor.
48.
NZP POLICE OFFICER DUTY CHARGES
48.1. If the Contractor is required to accelerate the work in order to complete the project within
the specified Contract Time, or if other conditions arise as a result of the Contractor's
management of the work which require that construction be accomplished during other than the
normal workdays and hours defined for this project, the Contractor will be required to assume the
cost of any additional inspection and NZP police officer services at overtime rates.
SCHEDULES AND PAYMENTS
49.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
49.1. The Contractor shall submit to the COTR a schedule of estimated values of all parts of
the work. The breakdown of costs on the Schedule of Values shall follow the divisions used in
the project specifications and shall reflect major items and groups of items shown on the
Contractor's project schedule. All values shall be in US dollars.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 21 of 31
50.
SCHEDULING & PAYMENTS / CRITICAL PATH METHOD
50.1. CPM Scheduling: The work under this project will be scheduled and reported by the
Contractor using the Critical Path Method. The approved Project Schedule(s) shall be used by
the Contractor for planning, organizing, executing, and directing the work; for monitoring and
reporting progress; and for requesting payment for work completed. All costs shall be identified in
US dollars.
50.1.1. Order and Inter-Dependence of Activities: The Critical Path Method will be followed to
show the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be
accomplished. Each activity shall be tied to all activities that must logically precede or follow it,
and all paths shall be continuous through to completion date(s).
50.1.2. Work Breakdown Parameters for Activities: The activities shown on the network diagram
shall include construction activities, submittal processing by the Contractor, submittal processing
by the Smithsonian, procurement activities for major equipment, fabrication of special materials
and equipment, installation of special materials and equipment, inspections, and tests. All field
activities that affect progress toward contractually required dates for completion of all or parts of
the Work shall be shown. The level of detail shall be such that the duration of any activity will be
no longer than ten (10) working days and no activity will have a dollar value exceeding $15,000,
except as allowed by prior and specific approval of the COTR.
50.1.3. Cost-loading of Activities: The Project Schedule shall include a dollar value (cost) for
each work activity. The cost shall include labor, materials, equipment, small tools, incidentals,
and a prorated portion of overhead and profit. The sum of all activity costs shall be equal to the
total Contract Price. Each activity cost shall be coded with a cost code corresponding to a line
item on the Schedule of Values.
50.1.4. Computer Software: The Contractor shall use a computerized CPM scheduling software
designed for use on IBM type personal computers. The name of the software proposed for use
shall be submitted to the COTR, along with literature about the program's capabilities, functions,
and operations, demonstrating that the requirements of the entire section entitled "Scheduling of
the Work / Critical Path Method" can be met.
50.2.
Required Schedules: The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Preliminary Project
Schedule, Complete Project Schedule, Condensed Summary Schedule, Progress
Schedules, and Recovery Schedules as described below.
50.2.1. Preliminary (Large) Project Schedule: Not later than twenty (20) calendar days after
receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit for review and approval by the COTR a
Preliminary Project Schedule in time-scaled diagram form, defining in detail the Contractor's
planned operations during the first 7 calendar days of the Contract Time. The Contractor shall
also provide a time-scaled summary of the general approach for the balance of the project. The
requirements set forth under the sub-paragraph entitled "Complete Project Schedule" shall apply
to the activities expected to be completed or partially completed during the first 7 calendar days.
The Contractor's submission of the Preliminary Project Schedule shall include four (4) copies and
one (1) reproducible.
50.2.2. Complete Project Schedule: Within14 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed,
the Complete Project Schedule shall be submitted to the COTR for review and approval.
The Contractor's submission of the Preliminary Project Schedule shall include four (4)
copies and one (1) reproducible.
50.2.3. Condensed Summary Schedule: Along with each copy of the Complete Project
Schedule, the Contractor shall submit to the COTR for approval a condensed summary version
consisting of not more than 250 activities summarizing major work elements.
50.2.4. Progress Schedules: Each month, the Contractor shall prepare a Progress Schedule by
inputting all information regarding actual start and actual finish dates, projected through the end
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 22 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
of the month, into the computerized Project Schedule. Complete discussion of this requirement is
contained in the section "Reporting Progress and Applying for Payment."
50.2.5. Recovery Schedule: If the work falls substantially behind the approved Project Schedule
the COTR may require the Contractor to submit a Recovery Schedule in accordance with the
Construction Contract Clauses paragraphs relating to "Commencement, Prosecution, and
Completion of Work." Upon request, the Contractor shall submit a Recovery Schedule to the
COTR for approval within ten (10) working days. The requirements set forth herein in the subparagraph entitled "Complete Project Schedule," shall apply to all activities shown on the
Recovery Schedule.
50.3.
Schedule Preparation: Schedules shall be prepared and submitted as network diagrams
with accompanying reports as described below.
50.3.1. Diagram Format: Diagrams shall be submitted on sheets at least 30 inches by 42 inches.
Each diagram shall show the date of the latest revision, the initials of the preparer of the diagram,
and the approval signature of the party authorizing its submission. The Contractor shall also
provide the COTR with a copy of the CD, or other recording device containing the Schedule.
50.3.2. Diagram Content: The following information shall be shown for each activity on the
diagrams: preceding and succeeding activities, description of the activity, cost of the activity, craft
involved, responsibility, and activity duration in calendar days. The critical path shall be
determined and shall be clearly indicated on the diagram. Network activity numbers shall be
assigned in ascending sequence so that preceding event numbers are smaller than the following
event numbers.
50.3.3. Schedule Report Data: Computer-generated reports from the CPM schedule shall be a
tabulation of all activities on the network and may include any of the following information for each
activity:
1.
Activity number;
2.
Activity description;
3.
Responsibility for activity (Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier,
Smithsonian, etc.);
4.
Total monetary value of activity (TV);
5.
Total duration in days (TD);
6.
Percentage completed (PC);
7.
Contractor's earnings-to-date based on percent of activity completed
(ETD);
8.
Estimated remaining duration in days (RD);
9.
Earliest start date, by calendar day (ES);
10.
Earliest finish date, by calendar day (EF);
11.
Actual start date, by calendar day (AS);
12.
Actual finish date, by calendar day (AF);
13.
Latest start date, by calendar day (LS);
14.
Latest finish date, by calendar day (LF);
15.
Total float time (TF);
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 23 of 31
16.
The Work item from the Schedule of Values used for progress
payments of which the activity is a part;
50.3.4. Standard CPM Reports: The following standard reports shall list all activities and the
indicated data for each activity, sorted and ordered as described. The Contractor shall provide
changes to these reports or creation of additional reports as requested by the COTR at any time.
1. Cost Report - sorted by responsibility, ordered by activity numbers (lowest to
highest); including activity numbers, activity descriptions, TV, TD, PC, ETD, RD,
and corresponding item number from the Schedule of Values.
2. Activity Report - in order of activity numbers (lowest to highest); including
activity numbers, activity descriptions, TD, PC, RD, ES, EF, AS, AF, LS, LF, and
TF.
3. Early Start Report - in order of early start dates, further ordered by total float
(lowest to highest), then by activity numbers (lowest to highest); including activity
numbers, activity descriptions, TD, PC, RD, ES, EF, AS, AF, LS, LF, and TF.
4. Total Float Report - in order of the amount of total float (lowest to highest),
further ordered by activity numbers (lowest to highest); including activity
numbers, activity descriptions, TD, PC, RD, ES, EF, AS, AF, LS, LF, and TF; and
reflecting all activities having less than ninety (90) working days float.
50.4. Review and Approval of Project Schedules: The Smithsonian will review the Preliminary
and Complete Project Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt of each. The
COTR will then schedule a meeting with the Contractor to review the Schedule and discuss any
questions or recommendations the Smithsonian may have. Any revisions required by the COTR
shall be submitted for approval within ten (10) calendar days after the review.
50.5. Changes to Project Schedules: During the Contract Period the Project Schedule will be
revised and updated to reflect changes to the plan of execution and work progress. Schedule
revisions and updates shall be executed and submitted as described below.
50.5.1. Contractor Revisions to Project Schedules: If the execution of the work varies
significantly from the Project Schedule or the Contractor desires to make changes to the
schedule, the Contractor shall submit a revision of the affected portion to the COTR along with a
statement of the reasons for the change. The COTR will review and approve or reject the
revision within fifteen (15) calendar days after receipt.
1. If the COTR observes work performed in variation from the approved
schedule and considers these changes to be major, the COTR will require the
Contractor to submit for review and approval, without additional cost to the
Smithsonian, revision of all of the affected portions of the network diagrams
along with standard reports to show the effect on the entire project.
2. A change will be considered major if the COTR determines that the change
may impact the contract completion date.
3. Changes that affect activities with adequate float time shall be considered
minor changes. An accumulation of minor changes will be considered a major
change when the cumulative effect modifies the contract completion date. The
effect of minor changes on logic shall be shown on each monthly update and
described fully in the accompanying narrative report.
50.5.2. Changes Related to Requests for Proposals: For all proposals involving requests for
time extensions or other significant changes to schedule, the Contractor shall submit a listing of
all the activities affected, added, or deleted (by node numbers). The effect in time and money
shall be described for each activity. If, in the opinion of the COTR, the proposed change may
impact the completion date(s), the Contractor shall submit a diagram of that portion of the
network schedule affected by the changes, along with standard reports for analysis.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 24 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
1. Diagrams and reports submitted to illustrate the impact of a proposed change
shall show the necessary revisions to activities, along with their costs, durations,
and trade responsibilities. Failure to submit such a diagram with a proposal shall
constitute a waiver of any claims for time extensions associated with the subject
of that proposal.
2. Modification of activity times shall be agreed to by both the Contractor and
the COTR. In the event that agreement on modified activity times cannot be
reached, the COTR will direct the specific time adjustments to be entered into the
program to determine approved, revised, contract completion dates.
50.6. Scheduling Consultant: The Smithsonian reserves the right to retain a scheduling
consultant to assist the Smithsonian in performing the Smithsonian functions under this section
and will inform the Contractor of its retention of such a consultant in writing. The Contractor will
cooperate with the scheduling consultant by furnishing information contractually required to be
furnished to the Smithsonian.
50.7. Reporting Progress and Applying for Payment: Each month the Contractor shall apply for
payment and submit a report of the actual construction progress as follows:
50.7.1.
By the 25th of each month, the Contractor and the COTR shall have
inspected the work to determine percentages complete for each item, projected through
the end of the month. The parties shall attempt to reach agreement on each item, but if
they cannot the COTR will determine percent complete. These percentages shall be
input into the latest revision of the Progress Schedule, including all revisions approved to
date.
50.7.2.
By the last day of the month, the Contractor shall submit an Application for
Payment based on the determined percentages complete for each item. The application
shall be submitted in triplicate on the Smithsonian standard Application for Payment form.
Each copy of the Application for Payment shall be accompanied by the following:
1. a complete set of reports as described in the "Standard CPM Reports"
section.
2. a complete set of copies of certified weekly-payroll data for the period.
3. a Change Order Status Report showing the following information for each
approved modification and each pending or proposed change: Proposal Number,
Modification Number (if applicable), affected activity numbers for each proposal,
and the approved price for each modification.
50.8.
Response to Application
50.8.1.
Payment shall be made only for progress agreed upon by the COTR,
performed on original Contract Work or approved modifications, in accordance with the
current, approved Project Schedule. Failure to submit the Application in accordance with
the specifications will prevent the processing of payments.
50.8.2.
Payments will be mailed or direct deposited to the Contractor's address as
identified in the contract documents on record with the Contracting Officer. Any changes
of address or requests for wire transfer of progress payments must be made in writing,
signed by the Contractor's authorized person, and submitted to the Contracting Officer.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 25 of 31
51.
ASSIGNMENT OF CLAIMS
51.1. Assignment of Claims are subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer. Any
Assignment of Claim or subsequent re-assignment shall meet the requirements of the General
Conditions contract clause entitled "FAR 52.232-23 Assignment of Claims".
51.2. All documents for assignments shall be written in the English language and shall be
original ink signatures of the Contractor and assignee. All monies shall be identified in US
dollars.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
52.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
52.1. Definition: Project closeout is a scheduled process for fulfillment of remaining contract
requirements at the end of the project in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal
termination of contract, beneficial occupancy, and establishment of the warranty period(s).
53.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
53.1. Definition: The date of Substantial Completion of a project or specified part of a project
is the date, as confirmed by inspection by the COTR, when the construction is at least 95%
complete and ready for beneficial occupancy, so that the Smithsonian can take possession of that
area or part of the work. Portions of the work that are specified to be phased for completion,
areas required for Smithsonian's use prior to completion of the total project, or items of work
identified by the COTR as necessary for partial beneficial occupancy may be inspected for
substantial completion separately from the rest of the Work.
53.1.1. The Smithsonian Institution reserves the right to occupy or install equipment in completed
areas of the building prior to substantial completion provided that such occupancy does not
interfere with the completion of the work. Such partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance
of any part of the work.
53.2. Request for Substantial Completion Inspection: The Contractor shall submit a written
request to the COTR for an inspection to establish Substantial Completion status. This request
shall specify areas or parts of the work to be considered, and shall include a listing of all
exceptions to the request, that is, items not considered to be substantially complete.
53.3. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prior to requesting Substantial
Completion Inspection, the Contractor shall submit to the COTR three (3) sets of manuals for all
systems and equipment, as specified in the technical sections of this specification. The manuals
shall be bound in letter-sized, three-ring, loose-leaf binders with durable plastic covers. They
shall be organized into suitable volumes of manageable size using the divisions of the
Specifications as a guide. Each manual shall have table of contents and shall be assembled to
conform to the table of contents with tab sheets locating each subject. The instructions shall be
legible and easy to read. Where oversize drawings are necessary, they shall be folded to be not
greater than letter-size. The words "Operation and Maintenance Manual", the name and location
of the project, project number, contract number, date, and the name of the general contractor,
shall appear on the cover. Manuals shall include, as a minimum, the following data:
53.3.1. Detailed description of each system and each of its components, including
layout showing piping, valves, controls and other components, and including diagrams
and illustrations where applicable.
53.3.2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed operation and control
of each component.
53.3.3. Control sequence describing start-up, operation, and shut-down.
53.3.4. Procedures for starting, operating, and shut-down.
Division 1: General Conditions
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Page 26 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
53.3.5. Installation instructions.
53.3.6. Maintenance and overhaul instructions.
53.3.7. Lubricating schedule, including type, grade, temperature range and frequency.
53.3.8. Emergency instructions and safety precautions.
53.3.9. On-site acceptance test results for equipment installed under this contract.
53.3.10. Approved product data, shop drawings, and system as-builts.
53.3.11. Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports (where applicable).
53.3.12. Notarized copies of warranties (originals to be provided as required by
"Warranties and Guarantees").
53.3.13. Written instructions for test procedures.
53.3.14. Performance curves and rating data.
53.3.15. Parts list, including source of supply, recommended spare parts, and service
organization convenient to Smithsonian.
53.3.16. Name, address, and telephone number of each subcontractor who installed
equipment and systems, local representative for each type of equipment and each
system.
53.3.17. Other pertinent data applicable to the operation and maintenance of particular
systems or equipment and/or other data as specified Divisions 2 through 16 of the
Specifications.
53.4. Other Prerequisites for Substantial Completion Inspection: The Contractor shall also
complete the following prior to requesting inspection for certification of substantial completion:
53.4.1. Testing and start-up of systems.
53.4.2. Installation of all signage, including accessibility related signs, equipment
instructions, identification labels, and permanent directional signs.
53.4.3. Submission of spare parts, tools, and surplus materials as required in technical
specifications.
53.4.4. Scheduling of training sessions for Smithsonian personnel.
53.4.5. Removal of all waste, rubbish, and temporary facilities and services. Means of
access to all areas of the work to be inspected by the COTR shall be maintained.
53.4.6. Disposition of samples and mock-ups not incorporated into the work.
53.4.7. Arrangement for permanent utility connections and billing responsibility transfer
to Smithsonian's Office of Facilities Operations (OFO).
53.4.8. Arrangement for transfer of security responsibility for the project site and
changeover of locks by Smithsonian's Office of Protection Services (OPS).
53.5. Scheduling of the Substantial Completion Inspection: Within seven (7) calendar days
after receipt of the Contractor's written request, the COTR will either schedule an inspection or
advise the Contractor of work that must be completed or prerequisites that must be met prior to
scheduling the Substantial Completion Inspection. In that case another written request for
Substantial Completion Inspection must be submitted when all requirements have been met.
53.6. The Substantial Completion Inspection: The Substantial Completion Inspection will be
performed by representatives of the Smithsonian Institution led by the COTR. During the
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 27 of 31
inspection the COTR will prepare a punch list of deficiencies in the work. If the punch list
becomes too extensive the COTR may cancel the inspection and require additional work to be
performed for a repeat inspection.
53.6.1. For satisfactory inspection results, the COTR will issue the written punch list to the
Contractor as soon as possible after the inspection. Items on the punch list must be completed
prior to final acceptance of the total project work.
53.6.2. For unsatisfactory inspection results, the COTR will within three (3) calendar days give
written notice to the Contractor that the Work or portion of the Work is not substantially complete
in accordance with the contract documents and therefore does not meet Substantial Completion
status. Requests for re-inspection shall meet all requirements for the original request for
Substantial Completion inspection.
53.7. Punch List: Incomplete contract requirements identified during the Substantial
Completion Inspection will form an initial basis for a punch list for final acceptance. All punch list
items must be completed by the Contractor within the Contract Time. If additional days are
needed to complete the punch list items beyond the Contract Time, then the Contractor shall
submit, prior to the end of the Contract Time, a written request to the Contracting Officer stating:
53.7.1. Items requiring additional time
53.7.2. Amount of time needed to complete each item
53.7.3. Reasons why the items cannot be completed by the contract completion date.
54.
FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
54.1. Definition: The date of final completion of a project is the date, as confirmed by
inspection by the COTR, when the Work is satisfactorily completed and accepted in accordance
with the contract documents, as amended and/or modified.
54.2. Request for Final Completion Inspection: When all items on the punch list have been
corrected to the satisfaction of the COTR and additional requirements as described below have
been satisfied, the Contractor shall submit a written request for Final Completion Inspection.
54.3. Prerequisites for Final Completion Prior to requesting the inspection for certification of
Final Completion the Contractor shall complete the following:
54.3.1. Submission of a copy of prior punch-list stating that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
54.3.2. Provision of Instructions to Smithsonian Personnel -where instructions to
Smithsonian personnel are specified in other sections, furnish, without additional expense
to the Smithsonian, the services of competent instructors, who will give full instruction in
the care, adjustment, and operation of the systems and equipment to designated
Smithsonian employees.
1. Each instructor shall be familiar with all parts of the system on which he or
she is to give instruction and shall be knowledgeable about the systems'
operation and required maintenance. Factory trained instructors shall be
employed wherever practical and available.
2. Unless otherwise required or approved, the instruction shall be given during
the regular work week after the equipment has been accepted and turned over to
the Smithsonian for regular operation. Where significant changes or
modifications in equipment are made under the terms of the contract, additional
instruction shall be provided as may be necessary to acquaint the operating
personnel of the changes or modifications. Unless otherwise stated, at least half
of the time allocated for instruction shall be "hands-on," using the actual system
installed.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 28 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
3. Upon completion the Contractor shall obtain written acknowledgment from
the COTR that the required instruction was completed.
54.3.3. Posting of operating instructions approved by the COTR for each system and each
principal piece of equipment. Include wiring and control diagrams showing the complete layout of
the entire system including equipment, piping, valves, and control sequence framed under clear
laminated plastic, and posted where directed by the COTR. Printed or engraved operating
instructions for each principal piece of equipment including start-up, proper adjustment, operating
lubrication, shut-down safety precautions, procedure in the event of equipment failure, and any
other necessary items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of the unit shall be
attached to or posted adjacent to the piece of equipment. Operating instructions exposed to the
weather or wet or humid conditions shall be made of weather-resisting materials or shall be
suitably framed and enclosed to be weather protected. Operating instructions shall not fade
when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling. The
Contractor shall coordinate the location of posted instructions with the COTR.
54.3.4. Provision of equipment demonstrations for each equipment item. The Contractor shall
coordinate scheduling of all demonstrations through the COTR.
54.3.5. Submission of original warranties for all products, equipment, and systems.
1. The Contractor shall assemble original warranty certificates or notarized
copies of warranty certificates executed by the Contractor, subcontractors,
suppliers, and manufacturers in a tab-indexed three-ring loose leaf binder with a
durable plastic cover. The table of contents shall identify the item covered, the
location of the item, the date of Substantial Completion, expiration date of the
warranty, and the supplier, vendor, and installing contractor. Duplicate notarized
copies of warranties shall be provided as required by "Manuals for Operation,
Maintenance, and As-Built Product Data."
2. Each warranty certificate or bond shall identify the date(s) for:
(1) Substantial Completion status in accordance with project closeout
requirements.
(2)
Beginning and ending of the warranty period.
(3) The Contractor shall provide any coincidental product warranty that
is available on a product incorporated in the Work, but for which the
warranty is not specifically required by the contract documents.
3. Warranty of Construction: The Contractor shall warrant that the work
performed under this contract conforms to the contract requirements and is free
of any defect in equipment, materials, design furnished, or workmanship
performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier at any tier. Unless
otherwise stated in the technical sections of the Specifications, the warranty of
the Work shall continue for a period of one (1) year from the date of Final
Completion status. If Smithsonian takes partial occupancy before Final
Completion, then the warranty for that portion shall be in effect for a period of one
(1) year beginning on the date of Substantial Completion for that portion of the
Work.
54.3.6. Submission of construction progress photographs and negatives, property survey, and
similar final record information.
54.3.7. Arrangement for change-over locks through the COTR and Smithsonian Office of
Protection Services as required for security for Smithsonian occupancy.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 29 of 31
54.3.8. Submission of evidence of payment and transfer date of utility company accounts for
those utilities previously billed to the Contractor during construction, as necessary.
54.3.9. Submission of evidence that all regulatory agency permit and code requirements have
been completed and recorded, as necessary.
54.3.10. Submission of a signed, written statement that no damage has occurred to the site as
documented by the pre-condition survey report.
54.3.11. Final clean-up, including:
1. Sweep and dust all surfaces and wash all finished surfaces to appear new
and free of all stains, soil marks, dirt, and other forms of defacement.
2. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
3. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a
polished condition, removing substances that are noticeable as vision-obscuring
materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.
4. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of dust stains, films, and similar noticeable substances. Except as
otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces.
Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.
5. Wipe surfaces of equipment clean. Remove excess lubrication and other
substances.
6. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar
spaces.
7. Wet-mop concrete and clean other hard-surface floors according to
manufacturers' recommendations.
8. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.
9. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those
resulting from water exposure.
10. Clean project site (yard and grounds) of litter and foreign substances.
Sweep exterior paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted
nor paved, to a smooth, even textured surface.
54.4. Inspection of the Work for Final Completion: Upon receipt of the Contractor's written
notice that the work has been completed the COTR will inspect the work to confirm Final
Completion status and acceptance of the work. As soon as possible after inspection, the COTR
will either provide written acknowledgment of final acceptance or advise the Contractor of work
not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final completion and acceptance.
54.5.
Application for Final Payment:
62.5.1. Application for Final Payment shall be submitted only after Final Acceptance has
been certified in writing to the Contractor by the COTR. Application shall include final
labor data and progress schedule update.
62.5.2. Final Payment will be approved when Final Acceptance has been certified and
the following conditions have been met:
1. Certification signed and submitted by the Contractor that all contract
requirements, including contract modifications, have been met.
2. Final Release of Claims submitted.
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 30 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 – QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
-6 August 2013
3. Release of assignment of claims or consent of surety submitted, as
necessary.
4. All security ID badges and parking permits returned to Smithsonian.
5. As-Built Record Drawings submitted. During the progress of the work the
Contractor shall maintain a complete and up-to-date set of record prints, open to
inspection by the COTR at any time. These prints shall provide a complete and
accurate as-built record of all changes to the Contract Drawings, including
rerouting of runs, relocation of items or control points, and all other modifications.
The exact location of pipes, conduit, or other features concealed underground,
under concrete, in chases, or above ceilings shall be shown by perpendicular
dimensions from at least two available landmarks. As-built drawings shall be
neatly marked with colored pencils or ink, marked "As-Built," and signed and
dated by the Contractor. Upon completion of the Work and before final payment,
the Contractor shall submit to the COTR photographically produced as-built
record drawings on 4-mil, double matte, mylar sheets, sized the same as the
contract drawings.
6. As-Built Record Survey of Underground Utilities submitted. If outside or
underground utilities are part of the work, the Contractor shall furnish to the
COTR for approval an acceptable and accurately dimensioned survey showing
location and elevation of underground storage tanks, all utility lines for water,
gas, electrical, sewer, steam, etc., including valves, connections and changes in
direction, as installed under the contract, within the property lines and outside the
building walls. Points where utility lines emerge from the building shall be
located from lot monuments. The survey shall be made to scale in pencil or ink
on 3-mil, double matte mylar sheets the same size as the contract drawings and
must be marked "As-Built" and signed and dated by the Contractor.
7. As-Built Record Specifications submitted. The Contractor shall submit one
set of project specifications with annotations to identify any changes made during
construction, referencing modification numbers, dates and originators of
authorizing letters or memos, and other sources of changes. The cover shall be
marked "As-Built" and signed and dated by the Contractor.
END OF DIVISION 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
Division 1: General Conditions
Page 31 of 31
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to NZP/SI ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site .
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
NZP will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct
selective demolition so NZP's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by NZP as far as
practical.
SECTION 02 41 19
Page 1 of 5
C.
Notify Architect/NZP/SI of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before
proceeding with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
2.
E.
Hazardous materials will be removed by NZP before start of the Work.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and NZP. Hazardous materials will be removed by NZP under a separate
contract.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review
and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
2.
Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
F.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
G.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
1.6
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
SECTION 02 41 19
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 –QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain:
protect them against damage.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NZP will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
C.
3.3
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to NZP.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
SECTION 02 41 19
Page 3 of 5
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Removed and Salvaged Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to NZP.
Transport items to NZP's storage area designated by NZP .
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly
Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials
necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SECTION 02 41 19
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –6 August 2013 –QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
3.5
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain NZP's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management
and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off NZP's property and legally dispose of them.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SECTION 02 41 19
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Product test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by UL or a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified
testing and inspection agency.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
SECTION 07 84 13
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.2
A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
Grace Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Johns Manville.
Nelson Firestop Products.
NUCO Inc.
Passive Fire Protection Partners.
RectorSeal Corporation.
Specified Technologies Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
USG Corporation.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,
based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C.
Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
D.
VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
E.
Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with
the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
F.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
SECTION 07 84 13
Page 2 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP –8 August 2013 –QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
D.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.2
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
NZP/SI will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.
C.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
3.3
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE
A.
Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants
1.
UL-Classified Systems: W-J- 7001-7999.
END OF SECTION 078413
SECTION 07 84 13
Page 3 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
General and execution requirements common to other 23 Sections.
2.
Piping materials and installation instructions common to piping systems.
3.
Transition fittings.
4.
Dielectric fittings.
5.
Test plugs.
6.
Equipment product and installation requirements common to equipment sections.
7.
Mechanical demolition.
8.
Painting and finishing.
9.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof and spaces above
ceilings.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces, mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and accessible shafts.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations, garage and at grade
locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Conditioned Space: Finished spaces and exposed interior spaces that are air conditioned.
Examples include offices, corridors, etc., that are served by air conditioning equipment. Returnair plenums are not conditioned space.
F.
Return-air Plenums: Space between ceiling and structure above when return air is transferred
from space to ceiling plenum in lieu of directly ducting return air from the space.
G.
K-Factor: Number of British thermal units of heat transmitted per square foot per degree
Fahrenheit temperature difference through a material with flat, parallel sides one inch apart.
H.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
SECTION 230500
Page 1 of 16
3.
4.
I.
1.4
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
2.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly
labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used.
B.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Transition fittings.
2.
Dielectric fittings.
C.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Manufacturers List: Submit within 15 days after award of the Contract.
a.
List of proposed manufacturers of material and equipment.
1)
If, prior to the expiration of the fifteen (15) day period or any duly authorized
extension thereof, the Contractor fails to submit a schedule of acceptable
material or equipment covering the items, the COTR will select the
manufacturer; such selection shall be final and binding upon the Contractor
as a condition of the contract.
2)
Rejected manufacturers shall be resubmitted within 15 days or the COTR
will select the materials and equipment manufacturers.
b.
After receiving approval of equipment manufacturers and prior to delivery of
material to the job site, submit for approval drawings or cuts showing construction
size, arrangement, operating clearances, performance characteristics and capacity
of materials and equipment. Each item of equipment proposed shall be a standard
catalog product of the approved manufacturer.
D.
Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for approval shall be properly
labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used.
E.
Welding certificates.
F.
Qualification Data: for Installer.
G.
Field quality-control test reports.
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.
Operation and maintenance manuals and record product data as specified in Division 01.
2.
Three complete bound sets of approved submittals for items of equipment utilized on the
project. Manufacturers' advertising literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for
operating and maintenance instructions. Refer to Division 01.
I.
Record Documents:
1.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
2.
Carefully record the actual locations of each piece of concealed equipment, control
devices, pipe, valves, ducts, terminal units, etc., including dimensions to locate
underground work, and work when different from the contract drawings.
SECTION 230500
Page 2 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C.
Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D.
Give necessary notices and obtain required permits. Pay fees and other costs, including utility
connections or extensions in connection with the work. File necessary plans, prepare
documents and obtain necessary approvals of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
Obtain required certificates of inspection and deliver same to the COTR before request for
acceptance and final payment for the work.
E.
Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with the latest issue of the codes, rules, and
regulations.
F.
HVAC Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer shall be a District of Columbia-licensed refrigeration and air conditioning
contractor who is qualified in the areas of work included in the Project.
2.
The successful contractor shall agree to employ only individuals who hold valid licenses
issued by the District Board of Industrial Trades Occupational and Professional Licensing
Division to provide, or assist in providing, heating ventilating, air conditioning, or
refrigerating system installation or service required for the project.
3.
If the successful contractor subcontracts any or all of the heating, ventilating, air
conditioning, or refrigerating system installation or service required for a project, the
subcontractor must possess the appropriate license required and issued by the District
Board of Industrial Trades.
4.
All heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and refrigerating system subcontractors shall
consistently use only individuals who hold the appropriate licenses issued by the District
Board of Industrial Trades to provide or assist in providing heating, ventilating, air
conditioning, and refrigerating system installation or service required for a project.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Proper and suitable tools, equipment and appliances for the safe and convenient handling and
placing of materials and equipment shall be used. During loading, unloading, and placing, care
shall be taken in handling the equipment and materials so that no equipment or materials,
including Owner furnished, are damaged.
SECTION 230500
Page 3 of 16
C.
Mechanical equipment delivered to the job site shall be stored under roof or other approved
covering, on pedestals above the ground. Enclosures for exterior equipment storage shall be
weatherproof. Any motors involved in the work that are not totally enclosed and
electrical/electronic components shall be stored in a heated area with a minimum temperature
of 50 deg. F. Valves shall be stored under roof on wood pedestals above ground. Pipe for
project use shall be stored above grade and in such a manner to prevent entrance of foreign
materials. Pipe shall be fitted with end caps or seals to prevent moisture and debris from
entering pipe. Insulation shall be stored under roof or in trailers, adequately protected from the
weather. Follow written instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and
requirements of the COTR in lubrication, protection and maintenance of equipment during
storage.
D.
If materials or equipment are found to be in poor condition at the time of being installed, the
COTR may, at his discretion, order the Contractor to furnish and install new equipment or
materials at no cost to the Owner.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
1.8
EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION
A.
See Division 1, Section “Project Closeout Requirements”, for general requirements.
B.
No equipment shall be operated for testing or trial use until there has been full compliance with
the equipment manufacturers' specifications and instructions for lubrication, alignment, direction
of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations.
C.
Particular care shall be taken to verify that equipment is completely assembled and properly
lubricated, and grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the
recommended lubricant.
D.
Where specified, provide services of the manufacturer or his authorized representative to
witness, supervise, or assist in the installation and start-up of equipment provided under this
Division.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
See Division 1 and General Conditions for general requirements.
B.
Provide service of the equipment manufacturer or his authorized representative, if required to
achieve specified performance of equipment provided.
C.
During the warranty period, service equipment provided except existing equipment, filter
replacement, and belt replacement.
Provide labor and materials in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions for service and maintenance. Prior to the start of warranty
period, provide to the Architect for approval, a schedule of required maintenance operations to
be performed during the warranty period and required periodically thereafter for each system
and item of equipment. Thereafter, monthly reports shall be submitted to the Owner for
SECTION 230500
Page 4 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
describing actual service performed. Forty-eight (48) hours advance notice shall be given to
Owner prior to work required.
1.10
DRAWINGS
A.
The contract drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangements of systems and
work included in the Contract. Do not scale the drawings. Consult the architectural and
structural drawings and details for exact location of structure and equipment; where same are
not precisely located, obtain this information prior to start of work.
B.
Layout of equipment indicated on drawings shall be checked and compared against drawings of
trades, and exact locations and clearances for servicing determined using approved shop
drawings of such equipment. Where the equipment furnished differs in physical character from
that specified or indicated or where physical interference occurs, consult with COTR as to
proper location of equipment. Prepare and submit for approval dated and dimensioned
drawings correcting such interferences.
C.
Although the location of materials and equipment may be shown on the drawings in a certain
place, the construction may develop conditions that render this location inaccessible or
impractical. In such cases, before fabricating and installing the work, the Contractor shall call
the condition to the attention of the COTR for direction. When requested by the COTR a
detailed drawing of the proposed departure due to field conditions, or their causes, shall be
submitted by the Contractor for approval. The COTR shall make final written decisions as to the
conditions, which require the changing of work.
1.11
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
See Division 1, Section “Project Record Documents” and “Project Closeout Procedures” for
general requirements.
B.
Carefully record the actual locations of each piece of equipment, control devices, pipe, valves,
ducts, terminal units, etc., when different from the contract drawings.
1.12
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
See Division 1, Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” and “Demonstration and Training”
for general requirements of demonstration and training.
B.
Upon completion of work and of tests, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for
operating and demonstrating the systems and equipment.
C.
The instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with parts of the installation on which he is to give
instruction and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary and as specified.
D.
Instructions shall include a general description of each system together with specific instructions
describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating
and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and
function of operating equipment and controls. Operating modes and the procedures for
indexing each mode shall be clearly described. Include lubrication charts and schedules of
frequency of lubrication for equipment, designating each point of lubrication and type of
lubricant to be used. Listings of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service
SECTION 230500
Page 5 of 16
organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same
shall be included.
E.
1.13
Provide operation and maintenance manuals and record product data as specified in Division 1,
Section “Operation and Maintenance Data”. Also, provide two complete bound sets of
approved submittals for items of equipment utilized on the project. Manufacturers' advertising
literature or catalogs will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions. Refer to
Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures”.
TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A.
See Division 01 “General Requirements.”
B.
As minimum, one five-pound CO2 ABC type extinguisher shall be provided with each work crew.
1.14
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
The remainder of the existing building will remain occupied during various phases of
construction. Coordinate with and be directed by the Construction Manager in the planning and
scheduling of work within the existing building not currently under construction.
C.
The Owner will occupy the existing building for the duration of the Contract. Contractor's work
shall be accomplished in such a manner as to cause the least impact on the operations of the
building. Contractor shall familiarize himself with requirements for phasing, temporary services,
and established time frames for completing certain portions of the work. The Contractor shall
furnish such employees, materials, facilities and equipment and shall work such hours
(including extra shifts) as may be necessary to ensure the completion of the work in accordance
with the requirements of Division 1 and as herein specified.
D.
In order to minimize the number and duration of outages, the Contractor shall schedule and
arrange for the simultaneous completion of tasks that require downtime of a particular system or
service or to arrange work associated with the particular system or service when it will have the
least impact on building operations.
1.15
ABBREVIATED LANGUAGE
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
Singular Number: Where any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular
number, such as "valve", such reference applies to as many such devices as are required to
complete the installation, shown, implied or otherwise, as indicated on the drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
SECTION 230500
Page 6 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.2
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
2.5
Transition Fittings, General: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 225 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
b.
Central Plastics Company.
c.
Epco Sales, Inc.
d.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
e.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
f.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
SECTION 230500
Page 7 of 16
D.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Calpico, Inc.
b.
Lochinvar Corp.
E.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Perfection Corp.
b.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
c.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
d.
Victaulic Co. of America.
2.6
TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Flow Design, Inc.
2.
Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.
3.
Sisco Manufacturing Co.
4.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
5.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B.
Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed
and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping.
C.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
D.
Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.
1.
Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR.
2.
Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.
2.7
EQUIPMENT – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Drives for Machinery:
1.
Motors are specified in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements for
Mechanical Equipment.”
2.
Equip each motor driven machine with a V-belt drive except those that are directly
connected. Factory designed and assembled belt drives that do not conform to the
following will be rejected.
3.
Select each drive according to the rating and recommendation of the manufacturer (and
as specified in other Sections) for the service with which used, giving proper allowance
for sheave diameter, center distance, and arc of contact.
4.
Belts shall be constructed of endless reinforced cords of long staple cotton, nylon, rayon,
or other suitable textile fibers imbedded in rubber. Use belts having correct cross section
to fit properly in the sheave grooves. Carefully match belts for each drive.
5.
Unless otherwise specified, motor sheaves shall be adjustable pitch type so selected that
the required fan rotation speed will be obtained with the motor sheave set approximately
in mid-position and have the specified pitch diameter in that position.
6.
Select the motor of a capacity needed to operate the equipment at the specified
mid-position operating condition, and so that they have a nameplate rating of not less
than 10 percent greater than the total of actual fan brake horsepower and drive loss at
specified capacity. Where non-overloading of the motors is specified, select the motor
SECTION 230500
Page 8 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
7.
8.
9.
B.
2.8
capacity rating at closed position of the motor sheave. In no case shall motors be a
smaller size than those scheduled.
Do not select fan sheave smaller in diameter than 30 percent of the fan wheel diameter.
Construct sheave of cast iron or steel, bored to fit properly on the shafts and secured with
key ways of proper size, except that set screws may be used for sheaves having 1/2-inch
or smaller bores.
Provide OSHA approved guards for belt drives, with instrument openings at the
fan and motor sheaves, constructed in accordance with SMACNA standards.
Submit shop drawings for approval.
Motor Starting Equipment:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, motor control centers, starters, disconnect switches,
combination starters and disconnect switches and variable frequency controllers shall be
provided by the Division 26 Contractor, except for packaged equipment as specified
under this Division.
2.
Magnetic motor starters and combination starters, which are integral part of the
equipment, shall be furnished by the Division 22 and 23 Contractors. Refer to Division 26
Section “Enclosed Controllers” for requirements.
PACKING MATERIAL FOR PENETRATIONS
A.
Mineral fiber; non-combustible; resistant to water, mildew, and vermin. Expanding resilient
foams manufactured for this purpose are an acceptable alternative only if the material density is
at least 3.0 pounds per cubic foot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Refer to General Demolition Notes on Drawings for additional demolition requirements and
procedures.
C.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed.
1.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Remove exposed piping
to point beyond finished surfaces.
2.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
3.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and
supports.
4.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, drain, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make
equipment operational.
D.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
SECTION 230500
Page 9 of 16
E.
3.2
Remove associated hangers, supports, wiring, controls, insulation, and pads for piping, ducts
and equipment to be removed.
MECHANICAL - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Refer to Division 01 Sections for general requirements.
B.
Workmanship:
1.
Furnish the services of an experienced full time field superintendent who shall be
constantly in charge of the installation of the work provided under this Division.
Superintendent shall have demonstrated experience with projects of comparable size and
complexity and shall be approved by the COTR.
2.
The quality of workmanship required in the execution of the work shall be the finest and
highest obtainable, working with the materials specified. Workmanship shall be
satisfactory to the COTR.
C.
Surveys And Measurements:
1.
Base measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established benchmarks. Work
shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify measurements at site and
check correctness of same as related to the work. Verify locations of existing work and
utilities and inverts of same prior to the start of any systems shown connecting to same.
2.
Should the Contractor discover any discrepancy between actual measurements or
conditions, and those indicated which prevent following good practice or the intent of the
drawings and specifications, he shall notify the COTR and shall not proceed with his work
until he has received instruction from the COTR.
D.
Cutting And Patching: Cutting and patching of building materials shall be performed in a neat
and workmanlike manner. Surfaces, which are damaged by the Contractor, shall be repaired or
provided with new materials. Patching and materials shall be done with materials and methods
similar to adjacent work, subject to approval of the COTR. Structural members shall not be cut
or penetrated unless indicated on the drawings and verified in the field with the Construction
Manager. Holes cut through concrete and/or masonry to accommodate work under this Division
shall be cut by reciprocating or rotary non-percussive methods.
E.
Accessibility:
1.
Locate equipment that must be serviced, operated or maintained, in fully accessible
positions. Equipment shall include, but not be limited to, valves, motors, controllers, ATC
dampers, drain points, cleanouts, etc.
2.
Where required or where directed, provide access doors. Locate equipment and
associated access doors in accordance with the architectural reflected ceiling plan
drawings. Doors installed in fire rated walls or shafts shall be labeled and shall match
rating of the construction. Doors shall be sufficient size to allow access to components,
except minimum size shall be 12" x 16". Access doors are specified in Division 08
Section “Access Doors and Frames”.
3.
The Contractor at no expense to the Owner shall rework equipment deemed inaccessible
by the COTR.
F.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
SECTION 230500
Page 10 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.3
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install test plugs in piping tees or threadolets.
J.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
L.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
M.
Unless indicated otherwise, sleeves are not required for core-drilled penetrations in solid
concrete construction, except when located in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
potential wet areas. Seal annular space between pipe or pipe insulation and concrete as
specified for sleeves.
N.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
O.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.4
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21, 22 and 23
Sections specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
SECTION 230500
Page 11 of 16
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.5
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.6
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each control valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Rigging:
1.
Verify that rigging path for equipment prior to start of work or ordering of materials. Verify
accessways and weight carrying capacity of existing building features, including freight
elevators, floors, walls, ceilings, and related features. When equipment or sections of
equipment are larger than available accessways, equipment shall be ordered in a
knocked-down configuration for re-assembly at the site. Submit in writing to COTR
where problems are encountered that may prohibit rigging of equipment into space with
the proposed solutions.
2.
Use planking or cribbing as required to protect adjoining construction from damage.
Protect equipment from damage until construction is completed.
B.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
C.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 230500
Page 12 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
D.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. In no case shall equipment be installed with service clearance less than
manufacturer’s recommendations.
E.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.7
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Equipment shall be installed and connected in accordance with the best engineering practice
and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Auxiliary piping,
valves, and electric connections recommended by the manufacturer or required for proper
operation shall be provided.
B.
See Division 26 for electrical power wiring and final connections to motors and equipment
requiring electric service. Temperature control wiring between starters and controlling devices
and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23, section “Instrumentation and Control”. Verify
that the proper power wiring services are installed prior to starting the equipment specified in
Division 23.
3.8
PAINTING
A.
3.9
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish. Provide complete new finish if, in the opinion of the
COTR, the factory finishes are severely damaged.
1.
Touch up threads of zinc coated screwed pipe with Rustoleum primer and one coat of
enamel conforming to painting specification.
2.
Refer to Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts” for painting requirements behind grilles and
registers.
3.
Prepare piping and ductwork and associated hangers specified to be painted to accept
field paint.
4.
Pre-construction photos shall be taken of existing to remain equipment surrounding
equipment which is affected under this project so that any damage to the existing
equipment finishes, as determined by COTR, will be repaired by the contractor.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 05 for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.10
CLEANING
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
Thoroughly clean exposed surfaces of equipment and material and leave in a neat, clean
condition ready for painting.
SECTION 230500
Page 13 of 16
3.11
EQUIPMENT STARTUP SERVICE – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements.
B.
No equipment shall be operated for testing or trial use until there has been full compliance with
the equipment manufacturers' specifications and instructions for lubrication, alignment, direction
of rotation, balance, and other applicable considerations.
C.
Particular care shall be taken to verify that equipment is completely assembled and properly
lubricated, and grease and oil cases and reservoirs have been filled to the correct level with the
recommended lubricant.
D.
Where specified, provide services of the manufacturer or his authorized representative to
witness, supervise, or assist in the installation and start-up of equipment provided under this
Division.
3.12
WELDING
A.
Welding piping shall comply with the provisions of the latest revision of the ASME Code for
Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping, and ANSI/ASME B31.9 - Building Services
Piping. Contractor shall comply with requirements of federal, state or local agencies having
legal jurisdiction that are more stringent than the above ANSI/ASME Codes.
B.
State, county, and city fire prevention code requirements, fire and safety regulations, and NFPA
241 shall be complied with, including the provision of appropriate portable fire extinguishers.
Prior to performing welding within the existing building, notify the Construction Manager in
advance of areas where welding will occur, and submit for approval a plan for protection of the
building and occupants. Proceed only upon receipt of Construction Manager’s approval and
provide reasonable barriers, coverings, etc., as required or requested by the Construction
Manager for protection of the existing work and building occupants. In regards to welding
operations within the building, maintain a negative pressure within the work area to prevent the
migration of smoke and fumes to occupied areas of the building. Provide temporary exhaust
fans and smoke removal systems as required - discharge of smoke and fumes shall be to the
building exterior in a manner to not be recirculated back into building through areaways,
windows, etc. and away from public accessways.
C.
Provide single-vee type butt welds, unless specified otherwise.
conform to ANSI B16.25.
D.
Before welding is performed, submit a copy of the Contractor's Standard Welding Procedure
Specification together with the Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
E.
Before a welder shall perform welding, submit a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or
Welding Operator Qualification Tests as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
F.
Welds shall have penetration complete to the inside diameter of the pipe and the recommended
spacing and bevels between ends of pipe prior to welding shall be used to assure full
o
penetration for pipe service conditions of 350 F and above (e.g. all medium pressure steam
piping). Weld penetrations for pipe service conditions less than 350oF shall be in accordance
with the applicable ANSI/ASME Code.
Joint configuration shall
SECTION 230500
Page 14 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
G.
Visual and nondestructive examinations shall be performed to detect the surface and internal
discontinuities in completed welds by an independent testing agency hired by the Construction
Manager. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with an independent testing agency so that
welds can be examined by the independent testing agency. The types and extent of
non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown in Table 136.4 of ASME
Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1-Power Piping and as contained herein. If
requirements for visual and nondestructive examinations are to be other than contained herein,
the degree of examination and basis of rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement
between the Contractor and the independent testing agency. The extent of visual and nondestructive examinations shall be as follows:
1.
The independent testing agency shall test a minimum of 10% of the total length or
number of piping welds by utilizing radiograph, ultrasonic testing, sectioning or a
combination of these methods as determined by the independent testing agency. If a
random weld test reveals that a weld fails to meet the minimum quality requirements, an
additional 10 percent of the welds in that same group shall be tested at the Contractor's
expense and at no additional cost to the Owner. If the additional welds examined meet
the quality requirements, the entire group of welds represented shall be accepted and the
defective welds shall be repaired. If any of the additional welds examined also fail to
meet the quality requirements as determined by the independent testing agency, that
entire group of welds shall be rejected. Remove and re-weld rejected welds or examine
rejected welds (at the Contractor's expense and at no additional cost to the Owner) and
remove and re-weld defects.
2.
Welds shall be visually examined as follows:
a.
b.
c.
3.
H.
Before welding -- for compliance with requirements for joint preparation, placement
of backing rings or consumable inserts (if used), alignment and fit-up, and
cleanliness.
During welding -- for conformance to the qualified welding procedure.
After welding -- for cracks, contour and finish, bead reinforcement, undercutting,
overlap, and size of fillet welds.
Welds determined to be unacceptable shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor,
at no additional cost to the Owner, in accordance with the applicable standards. Repair
defects discovered between weld passes before additional weld material is deposited.
Wherever a defect is removed, and repair by welding is not required, the affected area
shall be blended into the surrounding surface eliminating sharp notches, crevices, or
corners. After defect removal is complete and before re-welding, re-examine the area by
the same test methods that first revealed the defect to ensure that the defect has been
eliminated. After re-welding, re-examine the repaired area by the same test methods
originally used for that area. For repairs to base material, the minimum examination shall
be the same as required for butt welds. Indication of a defect shall be regarded as a
defect unless re-evaluation by non-destructive examination testing or by surface
conditioning shows that no unacceptable indications are present. The use of foreign
material to mask, fill in, seal, or disguise welding defects will not be permitted.
Pipe welds shall not be covered prior to examination by the independent testing agency.
Should the independent testing agency encounter pipe joints that are covered, Contractor shall
remove covering and replace with new covering, at no additional cost to the Owner, following
examination by the independent testing agency. Coverings shall include, but not limited to,
insulation, jacketing, outer conduit closure kits, special coatings, and backfill. Examinations of
SECTION 230500
Page 15 of 16
welds for the metal conduits for pre-insulated conduit piping systems may be covered without
examination by the independent testing agency.
I.
Welding at hangers, supports and plates to structural members shall conform to American
Welding Society, Inc. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code Steel.
J.
When requested by the independent testing agency or Architect, submit identifying stenciled
test coupons made by any welder in question. The Contractor shall require a welder to retake
the tests when, in the opinion of the Architect or independent testing agency, the work of the
welder creates a reasonable doubt as to his proficiency. Tests, when required, shall be
conducted at no additional expense to the Owner; and the welder in question shall not be
permitted to work as a welder on this project until he has been re-qualified.
K.
The use of backing rings shall be at the discretion of the installing Contractor provided that the
Contractor prepares and aligns pipes precisely to melt through to the inside surface - making a
full penetration weld. At the direction of the independent testing agency, the Contractor may be
directed to use backing rings (at no additional cost to the owner) when deemed necessary by
the independent testing agency after examination of the pipe welds.
L.
When weld testing or examination is performed as required herein, the corresponding written
certified test reports shall be submitted.
3.13
DEMONSTRATION – COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
See Division 01 for general requirements of demonstration and training.
B.
Upon completion of work and of tests, furnish the necessary skilled labor and helpers for
operating and demonstrating the systems and equipment.
C.
The instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with parts of the installation on which he is to give
instruction and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Employ factory trained instructors wherever necessary and as specified.
D.
Instructions shall include a general description of each system together with specific instructions
describing routine and emergency procedures required of the building personnel for operating
and maintaining each system. The instructions shall include the name or label, location, and
function of operating equipment and controls. Operating modes and the procedures for
indexing each mode shall be clearly described. Include lubrication charts and schedules of
frequency of lubrication for equipment, designating each point of lubrication and type of
lubricant to be used. Listings of names, addresses, and phone numbers of the service
organizations for each item of equipment and a typewritten maintenance schedule for same
shall be included.
END OF SECTION 230500
SECTION 230500
Page 16 of 16
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type and size of motor, provide nameplate data and ratings; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; enclosure type and mounting arrangements; size, type, and
location of winding terminations; conduit entry and ground lug locations; and information on
coatings or finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:
1.
Each installed unit's type and details.
2.
Nameplate legends.
3.
Diagrams of power, signal, and control wiring. Provide schematic wiring diagram for
each type of motor and for each control scheme.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
Motor controllers.
2.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
5.
Designed and labeled for use with variable frequency controllers, and suitable for use
throughout speed range without overheating.
SECTION 230513
Page 1 of 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in
HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.
B.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Three phase.
B.
Motors Smaller Than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
C.
Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
D.
Voltage Rating: NEMA standard voltage selected to operate on nominal circuit voltage to which
motor is connected.
E.
Service Factor: 1.15 for open drip proof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
F.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 104 deg F and at sea level.
G.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
H.
Enclosure: Open drip proof, unless indicated otherwise.
I.
Speed: 1750 RPM, unless indicated otherwise.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
D.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
F.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2.
Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
I.
Enclosure: Cast iron or rolled steel.
1.
Finish: Enamel.
SECTION 230513
Page 2 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 230513
SECTION 230513
Page 3 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230523 – GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Copper-alloy ball valves.
Drain valves.
Bronze globe valves.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts.
2.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control valves and
actuators.
3.
Division 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1.
2.
1.4
CWP: Cold working pressure.
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve
design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; actuators;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: ASME B31.1 for power piping valves and ASME B31.9 for building
services piping valves.
B.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
SECTION 230523
Page 1 of 5
2.
3.
4.
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set globe valves closed to prevent rattling.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
D.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Valve Actuators:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Chainwheel: For attachment to valves, of size and mounting height, as indicated in the
"Valve Installation" Article in Part 3.
Gear Drive with Adjustable Memory Stop: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and larger.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
Lever Handle with Adjustable Memory Stop: For quarter-turn valves NPS 5 and smaller.
F.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
G.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
H.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1
I.
Valve Manufacturer: Each valve type in same system shall be by a single manufacturer and
same model.
SECTION 230523
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.3
COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
Grinnell Corporation.
Jamesbury, Inc.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B.
Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C.
Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, solid chrome-plated brass
ball; PTFE seats, seals, and packing; 600-psig minimum CWP rating; and blowout-proof brass
stem.
2.4
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, NPS 3/4 ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum CWP.
Include two-piece, copper-alloy body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
2.5
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7, garden-hose threads and cap.
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Type 2, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
Grinnell Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
B.
Bronze Globe Valves, General: MSS SP-80, with ferrous-alloy handwheel.
C.
Type 2, Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves: Bronze body with hexagon gland follower, rising
stem, minimum four-sided stem to hand-wheel connection with self-locking nut, disc union-ring
bonnet, integral seat; aramid fiber and graphite packing with a neoprene binder for service up to
550 deg F.
SECTION 230523
Page 3 of 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1.
2.
Shutoff Service: Ball valves for water service.
Throttling Service: Ball, or globe valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Chilled-Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1.
2.
D.
Select valves with the following end connections:
1.
3.3
Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two -piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
Globe Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Type 2, Class 150, bronze.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for condenser water.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
C.
Locate valves for easy access, smooth and easy actuator operation, and packing maintenance;
provide separate support where necessary.
D.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
E.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
SECTION 230523
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.5
Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint
construction.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 230523
SECTION 230523
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR MECHANICAL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Metal framing systems.
4.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
5.
Fastener systems.
6.
Pipe positioning systems.
7.
Equipment supports.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 05 Sections for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe
and equipment supports.
2.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Control" for vibration isolation devices and
additional hanger and support requirements.
3.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
3.
Powder-actuated fastener systems.
SECTION 230529
Page 1 of 9
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the
following:
1.
Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2.
Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.
3.
Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.
4.
Equipment supports.
C.
Welding certificates.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
2.
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
3.
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
4.
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Grinnell Corp.
3.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
4.
Piping Technology & Products, Inc.
C.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.3
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.4
Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
SECTION 230529
Page 2 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP – 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.
4.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal
shield.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
2.
Erico/Michigan Hanger Co.
3.
PHS Industries, Inc.
4.
Pipe Shields, Inc.
5.
Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6.
Value Engineered Products, Inc.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.
D.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient
air temperature.
2.6
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Hilti, Inc.
b.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
c.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported
loads and building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
Hilti, Inc.
c.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
2.7
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
SECTION 230529
Page 3 of 9
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: Refer to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
F.
Size hangers and supports to match OD of pipe insulation.
G.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
5.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
6.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
7.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
9.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
SECTION 230529
Page 4 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP – 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
H.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4
to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
I.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
5.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
J.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
6.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
8.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
SECTION 230529
Page 5 of 9
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
K.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): Fill interior voids with insulation
that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
L.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
2.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches.
3.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
4.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
6.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
7.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
8.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
M.
Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
O.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
SECTION 230529
Page 6 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP – 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger and provide sheet metal shield for
insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
for plumbing fixtures.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,
expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
SECTION 230529
Page 7 of 9
M.
3.3
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include sheet metal shield
on exterior of insulation jacket.
3.
Install thermal-hanger shield inserts on cold piping with vapor barrier. Include sheet
metal shield on exterior of insulation jacket.
4.
Sheet Metal Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long.
d.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long.
e.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long.
5.
Insert Material for Type 39 Saddles: Length at least as long as protective shield.
6.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods.
SECTION 230529
Page 8 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP – 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.6
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting sections.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529
SECTION 230529
Page 9 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230548 - MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Elastomeric hangers.
2.
Spring hangers.
3.
Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories” for flexible duct connectors.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation
device.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding
Code - Steel."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
2.
Kinetics Noise Control.
3.
Mason Industries.
4.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
B.
Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric
isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Colorcode or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
SECTION 230548
Page 1 of 5
2.
3.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
Maximum Durometer: 70.
C.
Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert
in compression.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
7.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
D.
Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger
with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.
1.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
2.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
3.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
4.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
5.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
6.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.
7.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
8.
Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
E.
Resilient Washer-Bushings: Molded, oil resistant bridge bearing neoprene.
2.2
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish (where field painting of mechanical items is specified in Division 09): Manufacturer's
standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B.
Finish (where field painting of mechanical items is not specified in Division 09): Manufacturer's
standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.
1.
Powder coating on springs.
2.
All hardware shall be galvanized.
3.
Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.
4.
Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation devices to indicate capacity range.
SECTION 230548
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation devices for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before
installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Verify Section title reference with Architect.
B.
Install resilient washer-bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment,
arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
C.
Install resilient washer-bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment,
arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
D.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4.
Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to
installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole
and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air
pockets in the adhesive.
5.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
6.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
E.
Align vibration isolators squarely above or below mounting points of the supported equipment.
F.
Position vibration isolation hangers as high as possible in the hanger rod assembly but not in
contact with the building structure. Provide 1-inch minimum clearance between hanger housing
and structure above. Provide side clearance for hanger housings to allow a full 360-degree
rotation about the rod axis without contacting any object.
G.
Parallel pipes may be hung together on a trapeze that is isolated from the structure. Isolator
deflections must equal the greatest deflection for those pipes if isolated individually. Do not mix
isolated and non-isolated pipes on the same trapeze.
SECTION 230548
Page 3 of 5
H.
Do not hang or support piping, ductwork, conduit or mechanical equipment on other equipment,
pipes or ductwork installed on vibration isolators. Maintain 2-inch clearance between isolated
equipment and walls, ceilings and other equipment. Do not allow drain piping connected to
vibration-isolated equipment to contact the building structure or other non-isolated systems
unless it is resiliently mounted.
I.
Flexible Ductwork Connectors: Provide flexible ductwork connectors in ductwork at the point
where it is connected to externally isolated air handling unit casings, exhaust fans. fan coils or
any other vibration-isolated equipment. Install these connectors between the equipment and
the first associated duct support or hanger.
J.
Flexible Piping Connectors: Provide flexible piping connectors in piping where it is connected to
vibration-isolated equipment. Install these connectors between the equipment and the first
associated pipe support or hanger, except where supports connect to an inertia base common
to the equipment.
K.
The installation or use of vibration isolators shall not cause any change of position of piping
which will result in stresses in piping connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In
order to meet this objective, maintain equipment and piping in a rigid position during installation.
Do not transfer the load to the isolators until the installation is complete and under full
operational load.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage the isolator manufacturer or their authorized representative to perform
tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by an independent testing
agency.
2.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, and with at least seven days' advance
notice.
3.
Test equipment isolators and first four associated vibration isolation hangers from each
equipment connection.
4.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
5.
Measure isolator deflection.
6.
Inspect vibration control devices and remove paint splatters, spots, dirt, and debris.
7.
Vibration testing is specified in Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC.”
8.
If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory
results are achieved.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
SECTION 230548
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
Adjust active height of spring isolators so that isolated equipment is level and in proper
alignment with connecting ducts and pipes.
D.
Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.
3.5
HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE
ITEM DESCRIPTION
ISOLATOR AND BASE TYPE
MIN. STATIC
DEFLECTION inches
Slab On
Floor
Grade
Span
PIPING
First three supports near equipment
isolated with springs
First three supports near equipment
isolated with pads and mounts, and
non-isolated equipment
After first three supports, within 50 ft.
of isolated equipment, or within
mechanical room (whichever is
greater)
Spring Hangers with Vertical
Limit Stops (suspended);
Restrained Spring Isolators
(floor mounted)
Elastomeric Hangers
(suspended); Isolation Mounts
(floor mounted)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
0.35
0.35
Elastomeric Hangers
(suspended); Isolation Mounts
(floor mounted)
0.35
0.35
Spring Hangers (suspended);
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
Elastomeric Hangers
(suspended); Isolation Mounts
(floor mounted)
0.35
0.35
Elastomeric Hangers
(suspended); Isolation Mounts
(floor mounted)
0.35
0.35
Flexible Duct Connectors
(Refer to section 233300)
--
--
Flexible Duct Connectors
(Refer to section 233300)
--
--
Spring Isolators and Steel Base
0.25
0.75
Spring Hangers
--
0.75
DUCTWORK
First two supports near equipment
isolated with springs
First two supports near equipment
isolated with pads and mounts, and
non-isolated equipment
After first two supports, within 50 ft. of
isolated equipment, or within
mechanical room (whichever is
greater)
Connections to externally isolated
equipment
Connections to internally isolated
equipment without integral flexible duct
connectors
FANS
Within modular air-handling units
(provided by air-handling unit
manufacturer), up to 22-inch diameter
Suspended, up to 22-inch diameter
Notes:
1.
Static deflection equal to the isolators supporting the equipment.
END OF SECTION 230548
SECTION 230548
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:
1.
Equipment nameplates.
2.
Equipment markers.
3.
Pipe markers.
4.
Duct markers.
5.
Stencils.
6.
Valve tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Valve numbering scheme.
C.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies)
to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices
for piping.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
SECTION 230553
Page 1 of 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on
equipment.
1.
Data:
a.
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
b.
Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
c.
Labels of tested compliances.
2.
Location: Accessible and visible.
3.
Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
B.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
1.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
2.
Data:
a.
Name and plan number.
b.
Equipment service.
c.
Design capacity.
d.
Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions,
and speed.
3.
Size: 2-1/2 by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; 4-1/2 by 6 inches for
equipment.
2.2
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
3.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
4.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
5.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C.
Shaped Pipe Markers: Preformed semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe with mechanical fasteners that do not penetrate insulation vapor
barrier.
D.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive
back.
E.
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
2.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
SECTION 230553
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.3
STENCILS
A.
2.4
Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height
of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door
markers, and similar operational instructions.
1.
Stencil Material: Metal or fiberboard.
2.
Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black, unless otherwise indicated. Paint
shall be in pressurized spray-can form.
3.
Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1, unless
otherwise indicated.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers, with numbering scheme approved by Architect. Provide 5/32-inch hole for
fastener.
1.
Material: 0.032-inch- thick brass.
2.
Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
3.2
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 21, 22 and 23 Sections. If
more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is
Installer's option.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical
equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where
not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the
following general categories of equipment:
1.
Pumps, and similar motor-driven units. Heat exchangers, and similar equipment. Fans,
blowers, primary balancing dampers.
B.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment.
1.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
2.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.
3.
Locate markers where accessible and visibleDelete paragraph below if stenciled markers
are prohibited.
C.
Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
SECTION 230553
Page 3 of 5
3.3
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Pretensioned pipe markers.
Use size to ensure a tight fit.
2.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches (Contractor’s Option): Selfadhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch
wide, lapped at least 1-1/2 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
3.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Shaped pipe markers. Use
size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
4.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger (Contractor’s Option): Selfadhesive pipe markers. Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches
wide, lapped at least 3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full
circumference of pipe.
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in machine rooms; accessible
maintenance spaces such as shafts and plenums; as follows:
1.
Near each valve and control device.
2.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
4.
At access doors and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.
5.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
3.4
DUCT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install stenciled markers on ductwork:
1.
Stenciled Duct Marker: Stenciled markers, showing designation of equipment serving
ducts (EF-1, etc.), service (exhaust-air, etc.) and direction of flow.
B.
Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals
of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.
3.5
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; plumbing
fixture supply stops; faucets; convenience hose connections; and similar roughing-in
connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a.
Cold Water(HVAC and Plumbing): 1-1/2 inches, round.
b.
Hot Water (HVAC and Plumbing): 1-1/2 inches, round.
2.
Valve-Tag Color:
a.
Cold Water (HVAC and Plumbing): Green.
b.
Hot Water (HVAC and Plumbing): Yellow.
3.
Letter Color:
a.
Cold Water: White.
b.
Hot Water: Black.
SECTION 230553
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
other work.
CLEANING
A.
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 230553
SECTION 230553
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1.
Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
2.
Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
Constant-flow systems.
b.
Variable-flow systems.
3.
HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
4.
Vibration measuring.
5.
Existing systems TAB.
6.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
7.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C.
Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E.
NC: Noise criteria.
F.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
G.
RC: Room criteria.
H.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
I.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
SECTION 230593
Page 1 of 14
J.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
K.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
L.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of
a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
M.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
N.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
O.
Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
P.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6 copies of
evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified
in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 6 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 6
copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation"
Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.
D.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
E.
Certified duct pressure test reports.
F.
Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a.
Submittal distribution requirements.
b.
The Contract Documents examination report.
c.
TAB plan.
d.
Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
e.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
f.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
SECTION 230593
Page 2 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
3.
Certify that duct pressure testing has been completed in accordance with requirements of
Division 23 Section “Metal Ducts.”
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC
Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for
Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1.
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB
period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
D.
Coordinate partial installation of gypsum wall board and plaster ceilings to permit balancing of
supply and exhaust air devices without use of access doors.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Provide one of the following:
1.
National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC forms stating
that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm
fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following
provisions:
SECTION 230593
Page 3 of 14
a.
2.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
b.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in
completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the
Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
a.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
b.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
1.
Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of
Contract.
2.
Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract
Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01.
D.
Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine equipment performance data including fan curves. Relate performance data to Project
conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted
conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect
factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions
different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To
calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and
Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
G.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
H.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
SECTION 230593
Page 4 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
I.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
K.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
L.
Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.
N.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
Q.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Add
additional balancing devices if required. Observe and record system reactions to changes in
conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete and controllers are operational.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and
Air Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing"; and this Section.
SECTION 230593
Page 5 of 14
B.
Project Construction will be performed in phases. Some systems shall be tested and balanced
multiple times and at the end of more than one phase. Coordinate phasing requirements with
Owner’s Construction Manager.
C.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
D.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
E.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
F.
Prior to demolition of associated areas or equipment, test and record existing flow rates where
specified herein or noted on drawings, including but not limited to:
1.
Chilled water to remodel area.
2.
Air flow rate from remote AHU-6 to Docents Education.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components. Report deficiencies.
L.
Check for proper sealing of air duct system. Report deficiencies.
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
SECTION 230593
Page 6 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters. Achieve simulation by temporarily blocking a portion of the
filter area to achieve final air pressure drop scheduled on contract documents.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes to accommodate fan-speed changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling,
full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2.
Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances
of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at air terminals.
1.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
SECTION 230593
Page 7 of 14
3.6
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end
of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct
variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.7
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Check expansion tank liquid level.
Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
3.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
4.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.
B.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
C.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
D.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
E.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
SECTION 230593
Page 8 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
F.
3.8
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller (if provided) to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial
numbers, and nameplate data.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A.
3.10
A.
3.11
Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2.
Water flow rate.
3.
Water pressure drop.
4.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6.
Airflow.
7.
Air pressure drop.
PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic
temperature-control system.
PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS
A.
Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:
1.
Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer.
2.
Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second.
3.
Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils.
4.
Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz.
5.
Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.
B.
Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.
1.
Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter.
2.
Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.
C.
Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a
minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.
1.
Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing.
2.
Clear the space of people.
SECTION 230593
Page 9 of 14
D.
Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is
complete.
E.
Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.
F.
Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid
interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.
G.
Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp.
H.
Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and
building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal,
vertical, and axial planes.
1.
Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:
a.
Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
b.
Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end.
c.
Equipment Casing: Top and side.
d.
Equipment Base: Top and side.
e.
Building: Floor.
f.
Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections.
I.
For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation
blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the
differences.
J.
Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.
1.
Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations.
2.
Verify that installation is level and plumb.
3.
Verify that isolators are properly anchored.
4.
For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the
travel-to-solid distance.
5.
Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete
base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia
base and the floor.
3.12
A.
3.13
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 5 percent.
2.
Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
4.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
SECTION 230593
Page 10 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.14
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1.
Fan curves.
2.
Manufacturers' test data.
3.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
4.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
D.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final
report, as applicable:
1.
Title page.
2.
Name and address of TAB firm.
3.
Project name.
4.
Project location.
5.
Architect's name and address.
6.
Engineer's name and address.
7.
Contractor's name and address.
8.
Report date.
9.
Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a.
Indicated versus final performance.
b.
Notable characteristics of systems.
c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values.
15. Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following:
a.
Settings for exhaust-air dampers.
b.
Conditions of filters.
c.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
d.
Variable frequency controller settings for variable-air-volume systems.
e.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3.
Terminal units.
4.
Balancing stations.
SECTION 230593
Page 11 of 14
5.
Position of balancing devices.
F.
Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1.
Unit Data: Include the following:
a.
Unit identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and unit size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Unit arrangement and class.
g.
Discharge arrangement.
h.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
i.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
j.
Number of belts, make, and size.
k.
Number of filters, type, and size.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
Make and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
e.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.
f.
Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
g.
Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
h.
Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.
i.
Humidifier dispersion manifold static-pressure differential in inches wg.
j.
Outside airflow in cfm.
k.
Return airflow in cfm.
l.
Outside-air damper position.
m.
Return-air damper position.
G.
Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1.
Coil Data:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Coil type.
d.
Number of rows.
e.
Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.
f.
Make and model number.
g.
Face area in sq. ft..
h.
Tube size in NPS.
i.
Tube and fin materials.
j.
Circuiting arrangement.
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Average face velocity in fpm.
c.
Air pressure drop in inches wg.
d.
Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
e.
Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
f.
Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
SECTION 230593
Page 12 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.
Water flow rate in gpm.
Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
H.
Fan Test Reports: For exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
System identification.
b.
Location.
c.
Make and type.
d.
Model number and size.
e.
Manufacturer's serial number.
f.
Arrangement and class.
g.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
h.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
2.
Motor Data:
a.
Make and frame type and size.
b.
Horsepower and rpm.
c.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
d.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
e.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
f.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
g.
Number of belts, make, and size.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c.
Fan rpm.
d.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
f.
For fans with variable frequency controllers, indicate fan controller speed required
to deliver scheduled maximum and minimum airflows.
I.
Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct crosssection and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit number.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
d.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
e.
Duct size in inches.
f.
Duct area in sq. ft..
g.
Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
h.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
i.
Actual airflow rate in cfm.
j.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
k.
Barometric pressure in psig.
J.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
System and air-handling unit identification.
b.
Location and zone.
c.
Room or riser served.
SECTION 230593
Page 13 of 14
2.
K.
d.
Coil make and size.
e.
Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
Airflow rate in cfm.
b.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
c.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
d.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
e.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
f.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Vibration Measurement Reports:
1.
Date and time of test.
2.
Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number.
3.
Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor
horsepower.
4.
Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations.
5.
Measurement readings for each measurement location.
6.
Description of predominant vibration source.
END OF SECTION 230593
SECTION 230593
Page 14 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes mechanical insulation for boiler breeching, duct, equipment, and pipe,
including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Insulation Materials:
a.
Flexible elastomeric.
b.
Mineral fiber.
Insulating cements.
Adhesives.
Mastics.
Lagging adhesives.
Sealants.
Factory-applied jackets.
Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh.
Field-applied cloths.
Field-applied jackets.
Tapes.
Securements.
Corner angles.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ASJ: All-service jacket.
B.
FSK: Foil, scrim, kraft paper.
C.
FSP: Foil, scrim, polyethylene.
D.
PVDC: Polyvinylidene chloride.
E.
SSL: Self-sealing lap.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and
jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
SECTION 230700
Page 1 of 18
B.
Shop Drawings: Show details for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
Attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation, where applicable.
Insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.
Insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of
insulation.
Removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.
Removable insulation at pumps.
Application of field-applied jackets.
Application at linkages of control devices.
Field application for each equipment type.
C.
Installer Certificates: Signed by Contractor certifying that installers comply with requirements.
D.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation
materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include
dates of tests and test methods employed.
E.
Field quality-control inspection reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,
by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, and cement material containers, with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1.
C.
1.6
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation materials shall be tested and rated according to ASTM Test Method C-177 to
determine k-factors.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
B.
Protect all insulating materials from dirt, water and damage during storage and installation.
Remove damaged, wet or otherwise unsatisfactory insulation at Architect’s direction.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
SECTION 230700
Page 2 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct
Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation
application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and
for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing, where applicable.
1.8
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
2.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 schedule articles for requirements about where insulating materials shall be
applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with
ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Closed-cell
polyolefin/polyethylene insulation is not acceptable as a substitution for ASTM C534 closed-cell
rubber materials.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
SECTION 230700
Page 3 of 18
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
Nomaco K-Flex; Insul-Sheet and Insul-Tube 180.
2.
G.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products:
a.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
b.
Knauf Insulation; 1000 (Pipe Insulation).
c.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
2.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in Part 2 "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
Maximum K-Factor: 0.23 at 75 deg. F mean temperature; 0.34 at 250 deg. F mean
temperature.
3.
4.
2.3
Maximum K-Factor: 0.28 at 75 deg. F. mean temperature.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
B.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
1.
Insulating
and
Finishing
Cement:
Comply
with
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote.
Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal.
Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75.
RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
SECTION 230700
Page 4 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
b.
c.
d.
e.
D.
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
E.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.5
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient
services.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.
SECTION 230700
Page 5 of 18
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight.
Color: White.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
A.
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation
materials, jackets, and substrates.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 136.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fireresistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
1.
Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass and Polyisocyanurate Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
SECTION 230700
Page 6 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Vimasco Corporation; 750.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
ASJ:
White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket:
Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a
flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier
film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a
flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based
adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.
SECTION 230700
Page 7 of 18
a.
Products:
1)
2.9
Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and
Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
PVC Jacket:
High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784,
Class 16354-C; 20 mil thickness; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.
Color: White .
Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.
a.
5.
6.
2.10
A.
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps and mechanical joints minimum
20 mil thickness.
Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.
Density: 1 pound per square foot.
TAPES
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Johns Manville; Zeston.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series.
Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke.
Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136 and UL listed.
SECTION 230700
Page 8 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive.
Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.11
A.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
Compac Corp.; 130.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Bands:
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Childers Products; Bands.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4
inch wide with wing or closed seal.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to
accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
SECTION 230700
Page 9 of 18
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit
depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
3.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.
Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
4.
AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.
GEMCO; CD.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.
Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T.
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers:
Baseplate
fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated,
securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the
following requirements:
a.
Products:
1)
2)
b.
c.
d.
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
SECTION 230700
Page 10 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
5.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
6.
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
GEMCO; R-150.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
2)
GEMCO.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
C.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
D.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
ACS Industries, Inc.
C & F Wire.
Childers Products.
PABCO Metals Corporation.
RPR Products, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
SECTION 230700
Page 11 of 18
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
Comply with
COMMON INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings,
valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system
schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at anchors
and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
L.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
M.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
SECTION 230700
Page 12 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.
3.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer
to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
N.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
O.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
P.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
Q.
Replace insulation on existing piping, ductwork and equipment where indicated on the
drawings. Match insulation type and thickness indicated by the insulation schedule at the end
of this section.
R.
Replace insulation on new and existing piping, ductwork and equipment where insulation is
damaged during construction or removed for testing and balancing work.
S.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Handholes.
Unions.
Flanges
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this Article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
SECTION 230700
Page 13 of 18
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for
above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels,
and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the
connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated.
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Installation shall conform to the
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
SECTION 230700
Page 14 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
5.
3.5
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.6
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness
as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
SECTION 230700
Page 15 of 18
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks
and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
1.
3.8
Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the
finish bead along seam and joint edge.
FINISHES
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
B.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect.
inspection of the completed Work.
3.9
Vary first and second coats to allow visual
INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Acceptable insulation materials, thickness and vapor retarder requirements are identified for
each application and size range. If more than one material is listed for an application and size
range, selection from the materials listed is Contractor’s option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
Fire-suppression piping.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
SECTION 230700
Page 16 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Below-grade piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
Exhaust ductwork.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
C.
Where metal ducts are specified to have internal duct liner, the thickness of the external
insulation may be reduced by one inch, except minimum duct external insulation thickness shall
be 1 inch.
D.
Provide removable, replaceable insulation plugs at manufacturer’s equipment identification
plates and at ASME pressure vessel plates on insulated equipment.
VAPOR
INSULATION
RETARDER
THICKNESS
REQUIRED
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE DRAIN, EQUIPMENT DRAIN, & HUMIDIFIER DRAIN
PIPING
All sizes
Flexible Elastomeric
1/2”
Yes
CHILLED WATER AND GLYCOL WATER SUPPLY AND RETURN PIPING
40-60 DEGREES F
General Indoor Duty:
Mineral Fiber; or
1¼” diameter and smaller
1/2”
Yes
Flexible Elastomeric
1½” diameter and larger
Mineral Fiber
1”
Yes
1½” diameter and larger, Alternative
Flexible Elastomeric
1”
Yes
Insulation Material
SUPPLY-AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS 60 DEGREES AND ABOVE
Indoor Duty
Exposed
None
OUTSIDE-AIR DUCTS AND PLENUMS
Indoor Duty
Exposed
Mineral-Fiber Board
2”
Yes
SERVICE
SECTION 230700
Page 17 of 18
INSULATION
MATERIAL
3.10
FIELD APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION SCHEDULE
SERVICE
Indoor, exposed insulated piping within 8 feet of floor, for
service temperatures 200 degrees F and below
Indoor, exposed insulated piping greater than 8 feet above
floor, generally
Indoor, All Locations, Fittings and valves in piping systems at
service temperatures 200 degrees F and below
Indoor, exposed insulated ductwork greater than 8 feet above
floor
FIELD APPLIED
JACKET TYPE
PVC
None
Factory Fabricated PVC covers
None
END OF SECTION 230700
SECTION 230700
Page 18 of 18
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 230900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes control equipment for ACU-5. Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section “Modular Indoor Air-Handling Units” for ACU-5 and associated control
dampers D-1 & D-2 provided by the unit manufacturer.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Beneficial Use: COTR's operators are able to use the system and receive reliable information
in their normal work schedules for inputs and outputs in the automation system network.
B.
DCP: Digital control panel.
C.
DDC: Direct-digital controls.
D.
DPDT: Double-pole, double-throw.
E.
DPST: Double-pole, single-throw.
F.
LAN: Local area network.
G.
MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.
H.
PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.
I.
SPDT: Single-pole, double-throw.
J.
SPST: Single-pole, single-throw.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to
control mechanical systems.
B.
System shall be an extension of the existing Smithsonian Institution Siemens DDC System.
C.
Controls scope includes removal of existing ACU-5 and associated controls including
associated control panel/starter, temperature sensors, pneumatic control valve actuator, electropneumatic damper actuators, etc. and replacement with a new ACU-5 and associated DDC
control.
SECTION 230900
Page 1 of 14
D.
Provide new control panels and local control units and all necessary control wiring as necessary
to accomplish system installation and operation as specified here-in and as indicated on the
construction drawings. Connect new DDC controls to existing LAN from which the existing
ACU-5 controls are being removed.
E.
Refer to construction drawings for sequence of operations and other information related to
controls scope.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.
Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.
Written description of sequence of operation.
Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, pressure drop, and flow characteristics.
Schedule of valves including size, leakage, pressure drop, and flow characteristics.
Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device.
System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point
addresses, and operator notations.
System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams,
modems, and interconnections.
Settings of control devices.
Lists of proposed devices and equipment for each system drawing.
Calculations for sizing valves, dampers, and actuators.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
Device address list.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
D.
Software Upgrade Kit: For COTR to use in modifying software to suit future power system
revisions or monitoring and control revisions.
E.
Field Test Reports:
requirements.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
SECTION 230900
Page 2 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
F.
Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device.
Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
Calibration records and list of set points.
Start-up, normal, and emergency operating procedures.
Names, addresses, and phone numbers of equipment suppliers, subcontractors, and
manufacturer’s field representatives.
List of parts required for one year of continuous operation. Include parts numbers and
names, addresses, and phone numbers of supply sources.
G.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control
units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and
operating sequences.
I.
Documentation of instruments and sensors field calibration.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the
automatic control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required
for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing automatic temperaturecontrol systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems."
E.
Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system control components.
F.
Comply with ANSI B16.104, “Quality Control Standard for Control Valve Seat Leakage.”
1.7
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: During the warranty period the entire system shall be kept in proper
operating condition and serviced at no additional cost to the COTR.
B.
Special Warranty: Corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall
be updated on user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived software disks.
SECTION 230900
Page 3 of 14
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
B.
Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique
damper motor, valve motor, thermostat, and positioning relay.
C.
Maintenance Materials: One set of any special tools required for operation, adjustment,
resetting, or maintenance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Control Systems Components: As indicated in product articles.
Electric, Electronic, and DDC Systems: Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
DDC EQUIPMENT
A.
Operator Workstation/Interface: The existing remotely located central operator’s workstation
(OWS) shall be utilized to monitor, control, and interface with the ATC system. The ATC
contractor shall load software required on the existing operator’s workstation. The ATC
contractor shall provide network engineering and support services to implement all features of
the operator system software for the project. Provide hardware and software upgrades for the
existing operators workstation as required to accommodate the project control features and
functionality.
B.
Application Software: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Input/output capability from operator station.
Operator system access levels via software password.
Database creation and support.
Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system
schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units, chilled
water systems, and hot water systems, shall be provided as indicated on the construction
drawings.”.
a.
System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access
the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme,
menu selection, or text-based commands.
b.
Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and
status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall
automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention.
c.
Windowing: The windowing environment of the PC Operator Workstation shall
allow the user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze
total building operation, or to allow the display of a graphic associated with an
alarm to be viewed without interrupting work in progress.
Alarm processing.
Event Processing: Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either
workstations, DDC panels or the network media. The network shall include provisions for
SECTION 230900
Page 4 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
automatically re-configuring itself to allow operational equipment to perform their
designated functions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures.
Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power.
Data Collection:
a.
Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.
b.
Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity.
c.
Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data, and ensure alarms are
reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does not respond.
Graphic Development on Workstation: Graphic generation software shall be provided to
allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays.
a.
The ATC System contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and
symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, cooling coils,
filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volumeterminal reheat, VAV, etc.) and electrical symbols.
b.
The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in
conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:
define symbols; position and size symbols; define background screens; define
connecting lines and curves; locate, orient and size descriptive text; define and
display colors for all elements; and establish correlation between symbols or text
and associated system points or other displays.
c.
Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system
points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system,
building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in
the analysis of the facility. To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build
graphic displays that include point data from multiple DDC panels, including
application specific controllers.
Maintenance management.
Local Control Units: Modular, multi-tasking, comprising processor board with electronically
programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from
or upload to operator station, PC, mobile operator station, or DDC panel in the network.
Units shall be able to extend performance and capacity through the use of remote Local
Control Units.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Global communications.
b.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output.
c.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d.
Control processes.
e.
Energy management applications.
f.
Operator I/O.
Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator station.
Units shall directly support the use of mobile operator station. The capabilities of the
portable terminal shall include but not be limited to the following:
a.
Display temperatures.
b.
Display status.
c.
Display setpoints.
d.
Display control parameters.
e.
Override binary output control.
f.
Override analog setpoints.
g.
Modification of gain and offset constants.
SECTION 230900
Page 5 of 14
6.
7.
D.
Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement
the following capabilities from the control units:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Power fail Protection: System setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any
other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration
does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.
Application: ACU Controllers:
a.
ACU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of
systems to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of
this specification, and for future expansion: Large Air Handling Units, Mixed AirSingle Duct, and 100% Outside Air Single Duct.
b.
ACU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform
the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
c.
ACU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to
perform the sequence of operation as required by the I/O Summary Sheets in this
specification.
d.
Alarm Management: Each ACU Controller shall perform its own limit and status
monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing
unnecessary communications.
Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).
Control Algorithms: Pre-tested two position control, proportional control, proportional plus
integral control, and proportional, integral, plus derivative control.
Programming Application Features: Include trend point, alarm messages, weekly
scheduling, and interlocking.
Data Control:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The control diagrams on construction documents indicate devices required to be
connected to the remote electronic panels, and the standard control software modules to
be implemented. In addition, additional hardware and software required to accomplish
the detailed sequence of operations specified shall be provided. The following also
includes pseudo points required to be provided for display in logical groups and graphics.
Commandable pseudo points shall be commandable directly from displays.
Each analog point shall have unique remote panel resident dual high and dual low limit
alarm thresholds. Where specified, floating (a band above and below a setpoint) alarm
limits shall be provided.
Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the
monitored input does not track it's associated command output within a programmable
time interval, a "command failed" alarm shall be reported.
Where calculated points such as CFM are shown, they shall appear in their respective
logical groups. The respective unconditioned raw data (such as the logarithmic
differential pressure) points shall also be grouped in a special group for display and
observation independent of the logical groups.
Unless otherwise specified or approved prior to bidding, the primary analog input and the
analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a single remote panel containing the
DDC algorithm, and shall function independent of any peer or mux communication links.
Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received from the peer network, but
approved default values and/or procedures shall be substituted in the DDC algorithm for
this secondary input if network communications fail or if the secondary input becomes
erroneous or invalid.
SECTION 230900
Page 6 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.3
CONTROL PANELS
A.
Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located
adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch- thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum alloy,
totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard
shop-painted finish.
Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and automatic
switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments accessible through
front of panel.
Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including
damper-positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages.
Graphics: Color-coded graphic, laminated-plastic displays on doors, schematically
showing system being controlled, with protective, clear plastic sheet bonded to entire
door.
Isolate low voltage and line voltage terminals.
SENSORS
A.
Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, or duct mounting as required.
1.
B.
Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Thermistor Temperature Sensors: 10,000 ohm at 77 deg F; lead wires terminated on
enclosed terminal block.
a.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.4 deg F from 0 to 70 deg F.
b.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
c.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
d.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: Minimum 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone
to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as
required.
e.
Room Sensors: Locking cover; element terminated on clamp type connectors or
plug-in strip; push button for over-ride of unoccupied functions, where indicated;
plug-in communications jack; setpoint adjustment and indicator;.
f.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.
Set-Point Indication: Exposed.
Material: Stainless steel or aluminum.
Orientation: Vertical.
Room Sensor accessories include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.
Thermostat Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated.
Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
Set-Point Adjustment: 1/2-inch- diameter, adjustment knob.
SECTION 230900
Page 7 of 14
D.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers; solid state
type, adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current, with the following characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
Rating: 0 to 135 amps.
Sensor Voltage: Induced from monitored conductor
Supply Current: Induced from monitored conductor
Isolation: Minimum 600 VAC rms
Trip Set Point: Adjustable to ±7% of range
Zero Adjustment: None
Sealing: NEMA 12
Temperature Range: 15°C to 85°C
External Current Transformers: For loads exceeding 135 amps.
THERMOSTATS
A.
Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat (FZ): Snap-acting, single-pole, manual-reset switch in
NEMA 1 enclosure that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal
to or below set point.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Electric High-Limit Duct Thermostat (FR): Snap-acting, single-pole, manual-reset switch in
NEMA 1 enclosure that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal
to or above set point.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.6
Bulb Type and Length: Liquid-filled capillary, minimum 20 feet.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface; minimum one per coil
section.
Range: 30 deg. F to 60 deg F.
Electrical Rating: Minimum 2 amps inductive at 240 VAC.
Auxiliary Contacts: To allow thermostat to be connected to both the DDC system and
starter circuit.
Manufacturers: Penn Products or approved equal.
Bulb Type and Length: Liquid-filled capillary, minimum 20 feet.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface; minimum one per coil
section.
Range: 100 deg. F to 160 deg F.
Electrical Rating: Minimum 2 amps inductive at 240 VAC.
Auxiliary Contacts: To allow thermostat to be connected to both the DDC system and
starter circuit.
Manufacturers: Penn Products or approved equal.
ACTUATORS
A.
Sizing:
1.
2.
B.
Valves: Size for torque required for valve close-off at 35 psi differential pressure.
Dampers: Size for required running torque and 120 percent of the required full load
opening torque.
Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action.
1.
2.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Motors."
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in
SECTION 230900
Page 8 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.
C.
Electronic Damper and Large-Valve Actuators:
60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.7
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
Electrical Connection: Provide conduit fitting with minimum 3 feet of pre-wired electrical
cable.
Direct-coupled type designed for minimum
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
Run Time: 30 seconds.
Electrical Connection: Provide conduit fitting with minimum 3 feet of pre-wired electrical
cable.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable
composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.
2.8
DAMPERS
A.
2.9
General: Control dampers D-1 & D-2 for ACU-5 are provided by Unit manufacturer. Contractor
to provide damper actuators as specified herein.
MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES
A.
Provide necessary relays, accumulators, valves, positioners, switches, transformers, etc. to
make a complete and operable system.
B.
Time Delay Relays: Delay-on-energize or delay-on-release as shown; select range for the
application as specified and shown.
1.
2.
3.
C.
DPDT timed contacts with minimum continuous rating of 10 amps resistive at 120 VAC.
Coils rated for continuous duty at plus or minus 10 percent of nominal coil pilot voltage.
Manufacturers: Potter Brumfield, Magnecraft, Agastat, or Paragon.
Control Relays: Normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) contacts and number of poles
required to perform the indicated functions.
1.
2.
Contacts rated for no less than 110 percent of switched load, or a minimum continuous
rating of 10 amps at 120 VAC.
Coils rated for continuous duty at 100 percent plus or minus 10 percent of the nominal
coil pilot voltage.
SECTION 230900
Page 9 of 14
3.
4.
5.
2.10
A.
ELECTRICAL WIRING
General Wiring Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
A.
Wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electric codes and
Division 26 specification requirements, and the requirements herein specified.
Electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the ATC, as herein
specified, shall be provided by this specification unless specifically shown or called for in
other specifications.
a.
Control wiring shall include connections to control devices, interlock wiring, control
relays, and minor power wiring to auxiliary components for major pieces of
apparatus. Minor power wiring, 120 volts and below, shall include requirements for
such equipment as damper motors, solenoid valves, and interconnecting wiring on
apparatus that has not been factory installed. In general, control wiring that is not
factory installed or provided under other Divisions shall be provided.
b.
Power wiring, for the purpose of this specification, shall be defined as follows:
Wiring from the power source, i.e., panelboard, or motor control center, etc., to the
disconnect switch or disconnect switch and starter including wiring from these
switches to the apparatus.
Power for control devices, whether or not interlocked with motor operation, shall be
obtained from a separate 120 VAC source at the ATC panel or where directed. The
Contractor shall be permitted to wire one control relay or one solenoid air valve with
maximum power draw of 50 VA, to derive pilot power directly from the motor starter
control circuit. Devices are to be located remote and external from motor starter. Device
wiring is to terminate on terminal blocks provided in motor starter compartments. No
splices are permitted. Provide power wiring from the source to field mounted control
devices and panels.
Coordinate with the work of others. The plans are diagrammatic only and are to be
utilized as reference. Interconnection and coordination requirements necessary for a
totally operational control system are the requirement of this Section.
Operate electric and electronic mechanical controls at maximum 120 volts or less.
Provide voltage transformers and isolated relays where indicated or required for control
systems that operate at voltage other than 120V ac.
Transformers other than those used in bridge circuits shall have primaries wound for the
available current and secondaries wound for the correct control circuit voltage. Size to
have capacity capable to operate simultaneously components served plus 25 percent
overload for one hour. Enclose transformer in vented steel cabinet with conduit
connections and provide disconnect switch on the primary side and fused cut-out on the
secondary side.
Provide contactors, relays, and authority devices for control of single phase equipment.
Control Transmission Cabling:
1.
2.11
Relays mounted within panels may be plastic encapsulated socket mounted type, or
modular design with multiple convertible contacts, as required.
Relays located outside of panels shall be housed in enclosures rated for the intended
location.
Manufacturers: Johnson Controls or approved equal.
Twisted, shielded-pair cable, rated for use in return air plenums.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Perform manufacturer's standard shop tests for each component.
SECTION 230900
Page 10 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.
B.
Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring and pneumatic piping are
installed before proceeding with installation.
C.
Examine areas and conditions under which control systems are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and roughing-in
drawings, and details on drawings.
B.
Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
C.
Install equipment level and plumb.
D.
Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to
specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
E.
Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
F.
Install guards on room sensors in the following locations:
1.
Mechanical and Electrical Rooms.
G.
Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."
H.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
I.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section
"Mechanical Identification."
J.
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, flow switches, flow meters, and other accessories
according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."
K.
Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.
L.
Mounting of Panels: Control panels shall be installed so that they are stable and fully supported
throughout the entire panel, minimum one inch from the wall. Panels mounted on air system
housings or ducts are not acceptable. Ensure that panels are free from obstructions to allow for
ease of operation and maintenance.
M.
Load and debug software required for an operational DDC System, including data base,
operational parameters, and system control and application programs.
SECTION 230900
Page 11 of 14
3.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems."
1.
Minimum conduit size: 3/4 inch.
B.
Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C.
Install control transmission cable according to industry standards and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping
are exposed.
Install exposed cable in raceway.
Install concealed cable in raceway.
Install below grade and outdoor cable in Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Upon entering and
leaving a building, each conductor, including ground shield, shall terminate on a surge
protector designed to interrupt the circuit and shunt transient voltage to ground.
Control transmission cable may be run within drywall walls and above ceilings without
conduit protection. Support control transmission cable from structure with tie wraps. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the integrity and proper shielding
and grounding of control cable.
Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
No splices or kinks shall be permitted in control transmission cable. Terminations shall
be on panel-mounted terminal strips.
Grounding shall be in accordance with ANSI C2. Ground wire shall be copper. Control
cable, including communication links and sensor wiring, shall be grounded at only one
point for the entire system. Sensor wiring ground wires shall be terminated at the DCP
and connected to the communication link ground wire. Communication link ground wires
shall be terminated and grounded at the CPU.
Power wiring shall not be routed through the same raceway as control transmission
cable.
D.
Low voltage (50 volt or less) remote control and signal wiring may be run in multi-conductors
cable with PVC insulation, mylar binder and PVC jacket. Entire installation shall be in
accordance with Article 725 NEC, and shall meet additional requirements noted. Cables
carrying AC circuits sensitive to external field shall be shielded. Exception: Control wiring shall
be in conduit in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, in shafts and where exposed.
E.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to maintain automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
F.
Control power may be derived from line side of a starter provided circuits are fused and controls
so energized are associated only with this starter and motor.
G.
Control transformer furnished as an integral part of a starter shall not be used as a power
source for additional control.
SECTION 230900
Page 12 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
H.
Starter disconnect or separate switch immediately adjacent to starter shall disconnect power
from line voltage or 120 volt control wiring entering starter.
I.
Controllers and Operators: Controls shall be designed to function properly with a power source
voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1.
Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Provide necessary pressure fittings for installation of work. Size (for the specific range) and
adjust each differential-pressure switch used for fan and pump status to ensure reliable
monitoring and eliminate false status feedback.
C.
Ground equipment.
1.
3.5
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
ACTUATOR APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
3.6
Generally, provide electric/electronic actuators.
VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
3.7
Generally, provide globe valves.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment, and retest.
3.
Calibration test controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation with
compatible signal generator.
B.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
C.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1.
2.
3.
Start, test, and adjust control systems.
Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control
sequences.
Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation
specified.
SECTION 230900
Page 13 of 14
D.
Place Building Automation System (BAS) in the required modes of operation as requested by
the Testing and Balancing Contractor (TAB). Provide programming changes and reporting of
data from the BAS needed to achieve proper performance.
E.
Verify DDC as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Initial Demonstration Test: Upon the completion of work, tests, and specific function
demonstrations, and at a time agreed upon, operate the systems, in parts, for sufficient length
of time but not less than 30 days to determine whether the systems as a whole are functioning
properly.
1.
G.
Provide log identifying failures that occur. Indicate point name and number, time and
date of failure, and time and date of return to service.
Final Demonstration Test: Before the systems are turned over to the COTR, provide final
demonstration test of 48 continuous hours during which the systems shall operate without
adjustment.
1.
3.8
Verify software control sequences.
Verify operation of operator workstation.
Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.
Provide trend log (3 samples per hour) for each analog point.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train COTR's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Train COTR's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping,
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,
executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and
requesting logs. Include a minimum of 40 hours' dedicated instructor time on-site.
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."
Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
Schedule training with COTR, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
Partially demonstrate ATC work as systems are completed and accepted by the COTR.
END OF SECTION 230900
SECTION 230900
Page 14 of 14
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 232321 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water heating,
chilled-water cooling, condenser water systems, and energy recovery (glycol); makeup water for
these systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identifying hydronic
piping.
2.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for temperature-control valves
and sensors.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
1.
For each type of pipe, fitting, and joint indicated.
2.
For each type of hydronic specialty.
3.
For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and pressure drop curves
based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated balancing valves, and
automatic flow-control valves.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, special pipe support assemblies,
alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their attachment to the building structure.
Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
C.
Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D.
Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
SECTION 232321
Page 1 of 7
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with
other construction, including building structure, electrical conduit and raceway systems, light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B.
Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers:
following:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
1.
Calibrated Balancing Valves:
a.
Flow Design, Inc.
b.
Griswold Controls.
c.
Nexus valve.
2.
Strainers:
a.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
b.
Approved equal.
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.3
General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 with red bronze ring nut.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver).
2.4
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe, NPS 2-1/2 through NPS 12: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded),
Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel, plain ends. Type F (continuous weld) piping is not
acceptable.
B.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
SECTION 232321
Page 2 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 250, brass seat.
D.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
E.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1.
2.
3.
Material Group: 1.1.
End Connections: Butt welding.
Facings: Raised face.
F.
Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe
being welded.
G.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.5
VALVES
A.
Globe, and ball valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves."
B.
General valve requirements for valves (actuators, extension necks, etc.) specified in this section
are specified in Division 23 Section “General-Duty Valves”.
C.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
D.
Balancing Valves, Sizing: Line size, except where valve is outside of manufacturer’s written
recommended flow range.
1.
Maximum Permanent Pressure Drop: 2 feet of head.
2.
Minimum Achievable Flow Rate: 2.0 GPM at maximum 2.5 feet of head permanent
pressure drop.
E.
Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball valve with adjustable memory stop; refer to Division
23 Section “General-Duty Valves”.
1.
F.
2.6
Installer’s option, Calibrated Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller may be used: Bronze
body, chrome plated brass ball, brass stem, 125-psig working pressure, 250 deg F
maximum operating temperature, and having threaded ends. Valves shall have
calibrated venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral seals,
and be equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
Drain valves are specified in Division 23 Section “General-Duty Valves.”
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A.
Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 225
deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with NPS 1/8
discharge connection and NPS 1/4 inlet connection.
1.
Vents at top of vent chambers or coils shall be 1/4 inch ball valves.
SECTION 232321
Page 3 of 7
B.
Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and
nonferrous internal parts; 150-psig working pressure; 240 deg F operating temperature; with
NPS 1/4 discharge connection and NPS 1/4 inlet connection.
C.
Y-Pattern Strainers: 125-psig working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B), flanged
ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger, bronze body, threaded connections for NPS 2 and smaller,
bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Perforations shall
not exceed 1/32 inch; at terminal equipment control valves, provide 0.009 fine mesh screens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Chilled Water, NPS 2 and Smaller: Aboveground, use Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints. Use the fewest possible joints belowground and within floor slabs.
B.
Chilled Water, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40 steel pipe with welded and flanged joints.
C.
Condensate Drain and Equipment Drainage Lines: Type L drawn-temper copper tubing with
soldered joints.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve types:
1.
2.
3.
Shutoff Duty: Ball, and butterfly valves.
Throttling Duty: Globe, ball, and butterfly valves.
Balancing Duty: Ball and eccentric plug valves.
B.
Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection to
each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch line.
Install balancing valves and flow meter fittings at each branch connection to return mains, at
return connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C.
Install balancing valves and flow meter fittings in the return water line of each heating or cooling
element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for Mechanical" for basic piping installation
requirements.
B.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
C.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
E.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
SECTION 232321
Page 4 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe,
with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the takeoff
coming out the top of the main pipe.
G.
Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve,
in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install two nipples; ball valve and threaded cap in
blowdown connection of strainers. Install NPS ¾ (DN 20) ball valve for strainers NPS 2 and
larger; match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
H.
Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
I.
Use long sweep elbows throughout.
3.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
D.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch.
NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch.
NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch.
NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.
NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
SECTION 232321
Page 5 of 7
6.
E.
3.5
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
3.6
Refer to Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical” for joint construction
requirements for soldered and brazed joints in copper tubing; threaded, welded, and flanged
joints in steel piping.
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B.
Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system piping,
at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Install shut-off valve at
each vent. Extend discharge piping (1/4 inch annealed copper) to nearest floor drain, service
sink, or drain pipe.
C.
Install flowmeter fittings in accessible positions in piping systems and with at least minimum
straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from fittings, in accordance with
manufacturers written instructions.
3.7
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in
flanged joints to isolate equipment.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1.
2.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due
to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped air.
Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
SECTION 232321
Page 6 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.9
Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full of
water.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure
at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield
strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services
Piping."
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
Prepare written report of testing.
ADJUSTING
A.
Mark actuator position of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been
completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B.
Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.10
A.
Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.
Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design
requirements.
Lubricate motors and bearings.
CLEANING
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.
END OF SECTION 232321
SECTION 232321
Page 7 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, relief, transfer, and exhaust airdistribution systems in pressure classes from minus 10-inch wg to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts
include the following:
1.
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, flexible connectors, and flexible ducts.
2.
Division 23 Section “Common Work Results for Mechanical” for additional general
requirements.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of
duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for
layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design
results without increasing system total pressure.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each specified product.
B.
Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to minimum 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show
fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.
1.
Include shop drawings for all ductwork provided on this project.
2.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,
components, attachments to other work and extent of duct liner.
3.
Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
4.
Elevations of top and bottom of ducts.
5.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
6.
Fittings.
7.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
9.
Duct accessories, including access doors, panels, dampers, and air flow measuring
devices.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, and vibration
isolation.
SECTION 233113
Page 1 of 7
11.
Forward additional copy of installation drawings to testing and balancing contractor for
use as ceiling coordination drawings – see Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting &
Balancing for HVAC.”
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
E.
For each duct system, the gauge, material, joint type, seam type, and reinforcement to be
provided for each duct size.
F.
No ductwork shall be fabricated or installed until shop drawings are approved.
G.
Certificates: For certification required in “QUALITY ASSURANCE” Article.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code-Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint
and seam welding.
B.
NFPA Compliance:
1.
NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2.
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and FlexibleThird Edition,”
and all addenda for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods,
unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G60 (for circular ducts) and G90 (for rectangular ducts) coating designation; ducts shall have
mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view in finished spaces, suitable for field
painting.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
SECTION 233113
Page 2 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.3
SEALANT MATERIALS
A.
Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or
mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
Sealant applied within the building interior shall not exceed VOC limits listed in Division 01
Section “Supplementary Conditions for Construction.”
B.
Rolled Sealant Tape: 3 inches wide for slip joints, 6 inches wide for prefabricated slide-on
joints, and formed on flanges; 2 mil aluminum bonded to gray butyl adhesive minimum 30 mils
thick, 17 lbs per linear inch peel strength, 720 psi tensile strength, negative 20 deg. F to plus
200 deg. F service temperature, weather resistance per ASTM G-53 @ 2000 hours QUV,
suitable for up to 10 inch water gage SMACNA pressure class and all seal classes.
C.
Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and
modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
D.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when
cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts.
E.
Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
F.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
2.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
B.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Hanger Materials: Galvanized sheet steel or threaded steel rod.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section “Mechanical Vibration Control.”
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1.
2.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
SECTION 233113
Page 3 of 7
2.5
RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and
complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod
applications, and joint types and intervals. Fabricate ductwork to be free from vibration, rattle or
drumming under all operating conditions.
1.
Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure class.
2.
Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection limits according to SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
3.
Transverse Joints: Utilize prefabricated slide-on joints or formed-on flanges.
a.
Slip-and-Drive Joints may be utilized for transfer ducts, at Contractor’s option.
B.
Prefabricated Slide-on Joints: Constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material
thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, joining methods, and joint reinforcement.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Nexus, Inc.
c.
Quickduc, Inc.
d.
Ward Industries, Inc.
C.
Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction StandardsMetal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, joints T-25a or T-25b (TDC or TDF) using corner, bolt, cleat,
and gasket details.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Lockformer.
2.
Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant.
D.
Requirements for Prefabricated Slide-on Joints and Formed-on Flanges:
1.
Minimum sheetmetal gauges shall conform to both Rectangular Duct Reinforcement
Tables2-1 through 2-28 and Transverse Joint Reinforcement Table 2-32.
2.
Cleats or clips as manufactured for the specific purpose of joining adjacent flanges shall
be utilized in conjunction with transverse joints; sheetmetal screws alone are not
acceptable for joining flanges.
E.
Restrictions for Use of Tie Rods:
1.
Tie rods or other type of intermediate duct reinforcement shall not be used in ducts with
longest side less than 37 inches.
2.
Where tie rod connections penetrate ductwork, neoprene backed galvanized washers
shall be used to seal penetrations air-tight.
3.
Where tie rods are in sound lined ductwork, seal edges of sound lining penetrations with
sound lining adhesive.
4.
Tie rods at each joint and between joint and mid span shall align to minimize air
turbulence.
F.
Rectangular Duct Fittings:
1.
Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, etc., in accordance with
SMACNA manual Figures 2-1 through 2-10 and the following:
a.
Rectangular elbows shall be Figure 2-2 Type RE-2 with turning vanes. Turning
vanes are specified in Division 23 Section “Air Duct Accessories..
b.
Radius elbows shall be Figure 2-2 Type RE-1 only.
c.
Branch connections shall be 45 degree entry type only.
d.
Transitions and offsets shall follow Figure 4-7 and where space permits shall slope
a maximum of 15 degrees, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
SECTION 233113
Page 4 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
G.
2.6
Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger
and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts
are lined.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide tour of sheet metal fabrication facility for the Owner and their authorized representatives
to demonstrate fabrication and quality control procedures.
B.
The Owner or their authorized representative intends to periodically visit the sheet metal
fabrication facility to verify compliance with the quality control procedures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT APPLICATIONS
A.
Static-Pressure and Seal Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the
following:
SMACNA
PRESSURE
CLASS
(INCHES WG)
GAGE
PRESSURE
SMACNA
SEAL
CLASS
(Note 1)
Supply ducts from ACU-5 to air devices
2"
Positive
B (Note 1)
Return ductwork from space to ACU-5
2"
Negative
C
Outdoor air ductwork
2”
Negative
C
Transfer ductwork
1”
Positive
--
DUCT SYSTEM
Notes 1. Provide Seal Class A for ducts in Mechanical Rooms.
B.
Allowable duct leakage shall comply with SMACNA for the specified pressure class and seal
class.
C.
All ducts shall be galvanized steel except for discharge ducts at humidifiers, which shall be
stainless steel with all welded joints and seams.
3.2
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal
and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
C.
Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.
D.
Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure
couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3
screws in each coupling.
SECTION 233113
Page 5 of 7
E.
Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
F.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
G.
Coordinate layout with fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished
work.
H.
Seal all transverse joints and seams. Seal longitudinal joints where required by SMACNA Seal
Class. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire
joint and sheet metal screws. . Sealant applied within the building interior shall not exceed VOC
limits listed in Division 01 Section “Supplementary Conditions for Construction.”
I.
Sleeves, Generally: Install minimum 22 gauge sleeves between duct or duct insulation and
wall, floor, or ceiling penetrations.
1.
Size sleeve to provide annular space specified or detailed on the drawings.
2.
Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and
with approved sealant for gypsum board assemblies.
J.
Wall, and Partition Penetrations, Generally: Seal annular space between sleeves and duct or
duct insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
1.
Where sleeves are exposed in finished spaces, provide 1-inch wide perimeter flange
(including corners) on both sides of wall.
2.
There shall be no direct contact of duct with sleeves.
3.
Where ductwork passes through a wall, floor or ceiling, there shall be a clear annular
space of 1” between the duct or duct insulation and sleeve. After all of the ductwork is
installed the Contractor shall check the clearance, pack the voids full depth with mineral
fiber batt insulation and caulk both ends with a non-aging, non-hardening sealant backed
by a polyethylene foam rod or permanently flexible firestop material.
K.
Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior
walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or
duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on
4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
L.
Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations Required to Have Fire Dampers: Where ducts pass through
interior partitions or exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and
firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 07
Section "Penetration Firestopping." Provide sleeves as detailed or required by damper
manufacturer.
3.3
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A.
Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated.
1.
For pressure classes 2-inch wg and lower, seal transverse joints. Also seal longitudinal
joints for Seal Class B.
2.
See paragraph 3.1 for duct seal classes.
B.
Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.
C.
For ducts without external insulation in finished spaces, utilize tape sealing system.
SECTION 233113
Page 6 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
D.
3.4
For TDC/TDF and formed-on flange joints, provide sealant along exterior of joints (in addition to
the sealant on the flange faces).
HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A.
Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
B.
Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor.
C.
Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure
(proof-test) load.
D.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
1.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
END OF SECTION 233113
SECTION 233113
Page 7 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Fire dampers.
3.
Turning vanes.
4.
Duct-mounting access doors.
5.
Flexible connectors.
6.
Duct accessory hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control" for motor-operated dampers.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Volume dampers.
2.
Fire dampers.
3.
Turning vanes.
4.
Duct-mounting access doors.
5.
Flexible connectors.
6.
Flexible ducts.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
Special fittings.
2.
Manual-volume damper installations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Fusible Links: Provide adequate quantity for completion of construction and furnish 2
extra links.
SECTION 233300
Page 1 of 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G90 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.
C.
Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts
and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
D.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6.
E.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
F.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
2.3
VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Air Balance, Inc.
2.
American Warming and Ventilating.
3.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
4.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
5.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
6.
Metropolitan Air Technology.
7.
Nailor Industries Inc.
8.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
9.
Ruskin Company.
B.
General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen
damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed
position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct
consistent with pressure class.
C.
Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
D.
Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, opposed-blade design as indicated,
standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1.
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized or stainless (match duct construction) sheet steel
channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with
flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for
installing in ducts.
SECTION 233300
Page 2 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized or stainless (match duct
construction) sheet steel.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel (match duct construction).
Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze .
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
E.
Jackshaft: 1-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1.
Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
F.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
2.4
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Air Balance, Inc.
2.
Greenheck Fan Corp.
3.
Nailor Industries Inc.
4.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
5.
Prefco Products, Inc.
6.
Ruskin Company.
B.
Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555, listed for use in dynamic systems.
C.
Fire Rating: Minimum 1-1/2 hours.
D.
Frame: Curtain type; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered
and interlocking corners.
1.
Pressure Classes 2-inch and Less (Positive and Negative): Style B. (Blades outside of
airstream.)
2.
Pressure Classes 3-inch and Greater (Positive and Negative): Style C. (Blades and
frame outside of airstream.)
E.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick as indicated and of length to suit
application.
2.
Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame
complies with sleeve requirements.
F.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
H.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
I.
Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated.
SECTION 233300
Page 3 of 6
J.
2.5
Coordinate fire damper and sleeve installation as needed for duct termination applications.
1.
Non-ducted transfer opening with grilles on each side of the fire rated partition.
2.
Single-side ducted with grille on opposite side of the fire rated partition
TURNING VANES
A.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible"
for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate as double-vane with 2-inch inner-radius and 1-inch
outer-radius, with curved blades of minimum 26-gauge galvanized sheet steel set 2-1/8 inch
o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into 2-1/4 inch wide
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Duro Dyne Corp.
c.
Ward Industries, Inc.
2.6
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B.
Standard bolted access door: Oval outer door connected to an inner plate by spring loaded
carriage bolts, with hand knobs for tightening, inert cellular sponge gasket, and permanently
bonded polyester insulation (to prevent moisture from forming on outer surface).
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
American Warming and Ventilating
b.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
c.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
d.
Greenheck.
e.
McGill Airflow Corporation.
f.
Nailor Industries, Inc.
g.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
h.
Ward Industries, Inc.
2.
Doors shall be leak free at 20” w.g. static pressure.
3.
Doors shall be equal to McGill Airflow Corporation Model AOBXFSDF.
C.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
2.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.
2.7
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
2.
Duro Dyne Corp.
3.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
4.
Ward Industries, Inc.
B.
General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives
complying with UL 181, Class 1.
SECTION 233300
Page 4 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts. Fold and crimp metal edge
strips onto fabric as illustrated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Standard.
D.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
Service Temperature: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F.
2.8
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct insulation and sound lining thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards–Metal and Flexible–Third Edition .
B.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
D.
Provide volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead
from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from
branch takeoff. Variations in damper locations (from those indicated in the contract documents)
must be approved in writing by the Architect.
E.
Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets where indicated and where required for testing and
balancing.
F.
Install fire dampers with fusible links and electric sensors or thermostats, according to
manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. Coordinate fire damper and fire damper
sleeve installation requirements at non-ducted terminations in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
G.
Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories as
follows:
1.
Adjacent to fire dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links.
2.
To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum
50-foot spacing.
3.
On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
SECTION 233300
Page 5 of 6
H.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, oval access doors:
1.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6.
Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
I.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.
2.
Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
3.
Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.
4.
Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.
5.
Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.
J.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for Mechanical."
K.
Provide round takeoff fitting where round ductwork takes off from rectangular ductwork in
accordance with the following:
1.
Provide conical-type fittings where round takeoff is 3" or less than the rectangular duct
size.
2.
Provide flared-type fittings where round takeoff size is between 2" and 3" less than the
rectangular duct size.
3.
Provide side takeoff fittings where rectangular duct size is not at least 2" greater than
round takeoff size.
L.
Install metal nosing at duct access doors and duct taps installed in ducts with liner. Seal liner
behind nosing with adhesive.
M.
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and
motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
N.
Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum lengths of flexible duct as
shown in manufacturer's installation instructions and with 3 wraps of approved tape and
stainless steel draw band for tight seal.
1.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles" for connection
requirements above gypsum ceilings.
O.
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B.
Adjust fire dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."
END OF SECTION 233300
SECTION 233300
Page 6 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes ceiling-, floor-, duct-, and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers
not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and NC-value noise
ratings.
2.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, accessories furnished, NC-value, and pressure drop.
B.
Color Samples: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, Architect to select color.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
For installation of air devices in gypsum ceilings, coordinate with the sequencing of the gypsum
ceiling installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to
Basis of Design indicated, by one of the manufacturers specified.
GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A.
Double Deflection Grille:
1.
Basis of Design: Titus Model 300RL.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Carnes.
b.
Krueger.
c.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
SECTION 233713
Page 1 of 2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
d.
Titus.
e.
Tuttle & Bailey.
f.
Price.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, White.
Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal spaced 3/4 inch apart; adjustable deflection.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, and in accordance with Manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
C.
Construct and install duct connections to diffusers, registers, and grilles in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Modify duct systems (transitions, collars, etc.) as required to accommodate actual sizes of
grilles, registers, and diffusers.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
SECTION 233713
Page 2 of 2
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 237313 - MODULAR AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes
1.
Modular air-handling units with coils for indoor installations.
2.
Air Filters.
3.
Dampers.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Temperature controls except for devices herein specified to be factory installed are
specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.”
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.
1.4
Include the
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound power ratings at design duty. If fans are variable speed, provide
sound power level data for maximum rpm and also at 80% and 60% of maximum rpm.
Provide discharge, inlet and case-radiated sound power data for all fans.
Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor and fan accessories.
Material gages and finishes.
Filters with performance characteristics.
Dampers, including housings and linkages, with performance characteristics.
Smoke and fire rating data of materials used in contact with air stream.
Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1.
C.
For each type of modular indoor air-handling unit indicated.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and field-installed wiring.
Drawings depicting arrangement and dimensions of each component.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From manufacturer.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain modular air-handling units through one source from a single
manufacturer with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without
delaying the Work.
SECTION 237313
Page 1 of 9
B.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of modular
indoor and outdoor air-handling units. Refer to Division 1 Section “Product Requirements.”
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
NFPA Compliance: Modular indoor air-handling units and components shall be designed,
fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems."
E.
ARI Certification: Modular air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by
ARI. Coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
G.
Comply with ARI 850.
H.
Comply with ASHRAE 52.2 for method of testing and rating air-filter units.
I.
Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
J.
Sound Power Level Ratings: Test units in accordance with ARI Standard 260 “Sound Rating of
Ducted Air Moving and Air Conditioning Equipment.”
1.5
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of all bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into concrete bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.
B.
Coordinate sleeves through roof decks for piping services.
1.6
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Filters: one set.
Fan Belts: one set.
Gaskets: one set.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Units shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Inspect for transportation damage and store in clean dry place and protect from weather and
construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Replace damaged coils, components, etc., when directed, at no charge to Owner.
SECTION 237313
Page 2 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Trane Company (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group..
Carrier; Div. of United Technologies Corp.
McQuay International
Trane Company (The); Worldwide Applied Systems Group.
York International Corporation.
Basis of Design: Trane Packaged Climate Changer
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Modular indoor air-handling unit ACU-5 shall be factory assembled and consist of fans, motor
and drive assemblies, coils, plenums, filters, condensate pans, mixing dampers, control
devices, and accessories.
B.
Provide units with capacity and components as specified and scheduled. Footprint of
assembled units shall not exceed sizes indicated on contract drawings without written approval
of Architect. Unit configurations, locations of coil connections, and access sections shall all be
as indicated on the contract drawings.
C.
Indoor units shall be shipped with flanged sections as required for access into the building
mechanical equipment rooms.
D.
Unit shall be comprised of a main unit section containing supply air fan, cooling coil, and filter
components; and a damper/mixing section on the inlet with rear outside air damper and bottom
return air damper. Refer to drawings for arrangement of components.
2.3
CABINET
A.
Materials: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for
access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed.
B.
Construction:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Casings shall be capable of withstanding up to 6-inch wg positive or 4-inch wg negative
pressures.
Unit sections shall be supplied with G90 galvanized steel structural support base rails
designed to support the unit. Provide intermediate base members as required to support
components and personnel.
Perimeter lifting lugs for overhead rigging shall be provided on each section.
Unit panels shall be heavy-gauge galvanized-steel. Unit access panels and coil sections
shall be double wall construction with foamed-in-place insulation.
All sections
downstream of cooling coils shall be insulated with 1-inch, 1.5 lb/cu. Ft density fiberglass
insulation with foil-facing.
Casing panels and frames shall have thermal break construction.
Side panels shall be easily removable for access to unit and sealed against a full
perimeter gasket.
SECTION 237313
Page 3 of 9
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Insulation:
1.
2.
D.
Casing panels shall be removable for easy access to unit. Panels shall be gasketed to
ensure an air-tight seal.
Each component section shall have mating flanges for field assembly. The flange shall
extend around the complete perimeter of each section. Fasteners shall be located no
further than 12 in. on center. The manufacturer shall install closed cell gasket for full
perimeter coverage.
Fan supports, structural members, panels, or flooring shall not be welded, unless
aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material is used.
The fan sections shall have double-wall access panesl on both sides of the fan section to
allow full access to fan motor, drive and bearings.
Cooling coil section shall have coil tracks and double-wall access panel on both sides to
facilitate coil removal.
Filter sections shall be designed and constructed with gasketed filter rails to house the
specific type of filter shown on the equipment schedule. Filters shall be removable from
both sides.
Mixing boxes and damper sections shall have a double-wall access panels on both sides
of the section. Arrange damper blades to promote mixing of outdoor air and return air.
Cooling coil, drain pan and double wall access panels shall be factory insulated with
foamed-in-place insulation in compliance with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread
and smoke generation.
Fan section downstream of the cooling coil shall be factory insulated insulated with a
minimum of 1-inch, 1 1/2 lb./cu. Ft density foil-faced fiberglass insulation, or shall be
double-wall insulated similar to the cooling coil section.
a.
Fiberglass insulation shall have full coverage waterproof adhesive to firmly secure
the material to the unit casing interior and exterior panels. Insulation and
insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame spread
and smoke generation.
Inspection and Access Panels:
1.
2.
Panel Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall and insulated panels of
same materials and thicknesses as casing.
Inspection and Access Panels:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Locations and Applications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement
shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.
Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's
internal components.
Damper & Mixing Section: Access panels on both sides of section.
Filter Section: Access panels on both sides of section; large enough to allow
periodic removal and installation of filters.
Cooling Coil Section: Access panels on both sides of section; large enough to
allow removal of coil.
Fan Section: Access panels on both sides of section.
Drain Pans: Drain pans shall be constructed of insulated double wall stainless steel. The pan
shall be sloped toward the drain fitting. Drain pan shall have a recessed bottom drain design
with integral FPT elbow for side discharge and trapping on accessible side of unit. One drain
outlet shall be supplied for each section containing a drain pan. Drain pan shall allow no
SECTION 237313
Page 4 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
standing water and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62. Provide drain pans in the cooling coil
section.
F.
Casing Strength: For Draw-Thru sections casing shall be designed for a maximum 1:200
deflection ratio up to 3.5 in. static pressure, and with no permanent deformation at maximum
shutoff pressure of fan.
G.
Provide safing, galvanized steel or stainless steel as applicable, to prevent bypass around
filters, coils, etc.
2.4
FANS
A.
General:
1.
Forward-Curved, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades
with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to
flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set
screws. Fans shall be painted with zinc chromate primer and enamel paint. Fans shall
have a minimum AMCA Class II rating.
2.
Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be
selected with a maximum operating speed 25% below the first critical, and shall be
statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly.
3.
Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground, polished and coated with rust preventative
oil.
B.
Mounting: Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, bearings, drives, and motor shall be mounted on a common
base assembly which shall be isolated from the unit base with spring vibration isolators as
specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Vibration Control”. Fan outlets shall be isolated from
casing with flexible connections.
2.5
BEARINGS AND DRIVES
A.
Bearings: Grease lubricated, anti-friction with lubrication fittings extended to drive side of fan
section. Bearings shall be heavy duty pillow block type, self-aligning, regreasable ball or roller
type bearings selected for a minimum average life (L-50) of 200,000 hours.
B.
V-Belt Drive:
1.
2.
2.6
Drives shall be factory mounted, with sheaves aligned, fixed pitch type, with 1.5 service
factor.
For units with belt drive exterior to the unit casing provide OSHA-approved expanded
metal belt guard with tachometer hole that totally encloses the drive.
MOTORS
A.
General: Install on slide base to permit adjustment of belt tension.
B.
Characteristics: Premium efficiency type sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
C.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated and large enough so driven load will not require motor
to operate in service factor range.
SECTION 237313
Page 5 of 9
D.
Enclosure Type: The following features are required:
1.
2.
Open dripproof motors if satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
Guarded dripproof motors if exposed to contact with employees or building occupants.
E.
Noise Rating: Quiet.
F.
Nameplate:
Indicate ratings, characteristics, construction, special features, and full
identification of manufacturer.
G.
Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
Division 26 Sections. Factory wire each fan motor to an electrical junction box mounted on
exterior of unit utilizing flexible conduit.
2.7
COILS
A.
Coils shall be provided to meet the scheduled performance. Coil performance shall be certified
in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
B.
General Water Coils Fabrication:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Water Cooling Coils:
1.
2.
D.
Configuration: Coils shall be drainable, with non-trapping circuits. Working pressure shall
be 300 psig at 200 deg. F.
Coils shall be supplied with galvanized-steel casing.
Water Coils Source Quality Control:
1.
2.
2.8
Water coils shall have minimum 1/2 in. OD seamless copper tubes mechanically
expanded into fins to ensure high thermal performance with lower total flow and pumping
requirements. Minimum tube wall thickness shall be .025 inches.
Aluminum plate fin type with belled collars.
No turbulence-promoting devices will be permitted inside the tubes.
Headers shall be non-ferrous with MPT connections Headers shall have drain and vent
connections accessible from the exterior of the unit
Coils shall be same end connection and shall be circuited to achieve the maximum
pressure drops scheduled.
Leak test to 300 psig air pressure.
Leak test underwater to 200 psig.
DAMPERS
A.
General: Mixing boxes shall have low leakage dampers for return air, and outside air.
B.
Damper Operators: Specified in Division 23 Section “HVAC Instrumentation and Controls.”
C.
Low-Leakage Dampers: Double-skin, airfoil-blade galvanized-steel dampers with compressible
jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals, in parallel-blade arrangement with steel
operating rods rotating in stainless-steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel
frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not
exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg. To eliminate blade warping,
dampers shall be sectionalized to limit blade length to 48 inches maximum.
SECTION 237313
Page 6 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.9
FILTER SECTIONS
A.
PLEATED-TYPE, DISPOSABLE PANEL PRE-FILTERS
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Air Filters and Filter-Holding Systems:
AAF International.
Cambridge / Farr Co.
Flanders Filters, Inc.
Description: 2” thick Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters
UL listed: Class 2.
MERV: 7
Media: Fibrous non-woven cotton and synthetic fabric material formed into deep-Vshaped pleats with anti-microbial agent and held by self-supporting welded wire grid.
Pleats per linear foot: 2-inch thick: Minimum 15
Square-foot of media per square foot of filter face area: 2-inch thick: Minimum 4.3 sq. ft.
Media and Media-Grid Frame:
Nonflammable cardboard, with diagonal support
members.
B.
Provide filter section with full size gasketed access panels, and pre-filters. Filter track shall run
full width of unit and have nylon sliding seals. Filters shall be replaceable from service side of
unit.
C.
For each filter section, provide a factory installed Dwyer Model 2001-AF magnahelic air filter
gage complete with static pressure tips, adjustable signal flag, tubing and accessories. Mount
gage in visible location on the side of Air Handling Unit beside access door to filter section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of hydronic and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical
services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Arrange installation of units to provide access space around modular air-handling units for
service and maintenance.
B.
Install filters in equipment frames to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
SECTION 237313
Page 7 of 9
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect condensate drain pans; extend to nearest floor drain. Construct deep trap at
connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. Refer to detail on contract
drawings.
D.
Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section “Hydronic Piping.” Connect to
supply and return coil tappings with piping components as indicated by details on contract
drawings.
E.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. The following are
specific connection requirements:
1.
Install ducts to termination on unit.
F.
Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections for power wiring,
switches, and motor controls.
G.
Ground equipment according to Division 26.
H.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections. Report results in writing.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Leak Test: After installation, fill coils with water and test coils and connections for leaks.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
units, and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B.
Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
SECTION 237313
Page 8 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Starting procedures for modular air-handling units include the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.6
Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan
wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts,
and install belt guards.
Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
Install clean filters.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire dampers in connected duct
systems are in fully open position.
Check vibration isolation devices for proper operation.
Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated rpm. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design
conditions.
Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
Refer to Division 23 Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for modular air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean modular air-handling units internally, on completion of installation, according to
manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
Remove any elements of rust and restore surfaces and finishes to original condition.
B.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing modular air-handling
and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain modular air-handling units. Refer to Division 1 Section
“Demonstration and Training.”
END OF SECTION 237313
SECTION 237313
Page 9 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260513 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for mediumvoltage electrical distribution systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of cable indicated. Include splices and terminations for cables and
cable accessories.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B.
Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to install,
splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
C.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
SECTION 260513
Page 1 of 5
Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single
E.
1.7
Comply with IEEE C2, “National Electrical Safety Code” and NFPA 70, “National Electrical
Code.”
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
COTR or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Coordinate with COTR in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Kerite Co. (The); Hubbell Incorporated.
Okonite Company (The).
Prysmian Power Cables and Systems (Pirelli).
Rome Cable Corporation.
Southwire Company.
Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Engineered Products Company.
G&W Electric Company.
MPHusky.
Raychem Corp.; Telephone Energy and Industrial Division; Tyco International Ltd.
RTE Components; Cooper Power Systems, Inc.
Prysmian Power Cables and Systems (Pirelli).
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold.
3M; Electrical Products Division.
CABLES
A.
Cable Type: MV105.
B.
Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639, and ICEA S-97-682.
C.
Conductor: Copper.
D.
Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.
E.
Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber (EPR).
1.
Voltage Rating: 15 kV.
SECTION 260513
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.
Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level.
F.
Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.
G.
Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.
2.3
SPLICE KITS
A.
Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing
kit manufacturer for the application.
B.
Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes,
ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for complete
splice, with detailed instructions.
1.
2.
2.4
Premolded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit.
Premolded EPDM splicing body kit with cable joint sealed by interference fit of mating
parts and cable.
SOLID TERMINATIONS
A.
Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class is
equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.
1.
2.5
Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple,
molded-silicone rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type
connector.
SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS
A.
Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable
terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for cable
voltage and for sealing against moisture.
B.
Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and continuouscurrent rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being
terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.
C.
Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test
points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators capable
of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool.
D.
Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and
carrying case.
2.6
ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS
A.
Tape for First Course on Metal Objects: 10-mil- thick, corrosion-protective, moisture-resistant,
PVC pipe-wrapping tape.
B.
Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch thick,
compatible with cable jacket.
SECTION 260513
Page 3 of 5
C.
2.7
Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2 inch wide.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cables according to IEEE 576, “Recommended Practice for Installation, Termination and
Testing of Insulated Power Cable as Used in Industrial and Commercial Applications.”
B.
Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and
sidewall pressure values.
1.
2.
Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that will not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that
will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to
cable.
C.
In pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route
from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag.
D.
Install cable splices at pull points and elsewhere as indicated; use standard kits.
E.
Install terminations at ends of conductors with standard kits.
F.
Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable within the cable
vault. In addition to arc-proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean cable sheath.
Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil pipe-wrapping tape.
Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.
Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable.
Band arc-proofing tape with 1-inch- wide bands of half-lapped, adhesive, glass-cloth tape
2 inches o.c.
G.
Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements according to Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping."
H.
Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.
Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,
and hardware.
I.
Identify cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SECTION 260513
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
B.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.
Certify compliance with test parameters.
After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 260513
SECTION 260513
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.
Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Senator Wire & Cable Company.
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
C.
Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-THWN-2.
2.2
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
3M; Electrical Markets Division.
Tyco Electronics.
SECTION 260519
Page 1 of 3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
B.
2.3
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
B.
Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and
larger.
3.2
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING
METHODS
A.
Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway
B.
Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in
raceway
3.3
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and
cables.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B.
B.
Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced
conductors.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
SECTION 260519
Page 2 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
3.6
Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of
conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.7
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.8
Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration
Firestopping."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Procedures used.
Results that comply with requirements.
Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
Cables and conductors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION 260519
SECTION 260519
Page 3 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
C.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
SECTION 260529
Page 1 of 3
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Wesanco, Inc.
2.
3.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
B.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
4.
5.
6.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors:
Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
3.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1)
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3)
Hilti Inc.
4)
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
SECTION 260529
Page 2 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future
without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.
Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported
components plus 200 lb.
C.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
2.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
3.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less
than 4 inches thick.
4.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.
5.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
6.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
D.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
3.3
PAINTING
A.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 260529
SECTION 260529
Page 3 of 3
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
B.
IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.
B.
Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1.
2.
Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.
HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
Anamet Electrical, Inc.
Electri-Flex Company.
SECTION 260533
Page 1 of 5
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
Republic Conduit.
Robroy Industries.
Southwire Company.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined
in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D.
IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.
E.
EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
F.
Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1.
Fittings for EMT:
a.
b.
2.
G.
2.2
Material: Steel.
Type: Compression.
Expansion Fittings: Steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1.
Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
D.
Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
SECTION 260533
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.3
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Adalet.
Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
EGS/Appleton Electric.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
Hoffman; a Pentair company.
Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
Milbank Manufacturing Co.
Mono-Systems, Inc.
O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
RACO; a Hubbell Company.
Robroy Industries.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Wiremold / Legrand.
B.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes:
gasketed cover.
E.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.
Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the
following:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC
Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless
steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
SECTION 260533
Page 3 of 5
Parking area
Mechanical rooms.
Electrical rooms
B.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements
on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of
raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
C.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
D.
Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for
hangers and supports.
E.
Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for
control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes
in direction.
F.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.
H.
Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1.
2.
Use EMT, IMC, or GRC for raceways.
Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
I.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
J.
Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
K.
Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
L.
Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter
or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
SECTION 260533
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
M.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
N.
Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
raceways at the following points:
1.
Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
2.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
O.
Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1.
Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
2.
Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time
of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
P.
Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for
transformers and motors.
Q.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of
box unless otherwise indicated.
R.
Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A.
3.4
Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and
Cabling."
FIRESTOPPING
A.
3.5
Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
Comply with
PROTECTION
A.
Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 260533
SECTION 260533
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Identification for raceways.
Identification of power and control cables.
Identification for conductors.
Warning labels and signs.
Equipment identification labels.
Miscellaneous identification products.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
B.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
C.
Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
SECTION 260553
Page 1 of 5
B.
Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1.
2.
Black letters on an orange field.
Legend: Indicate voltage.
C.
Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway
or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
E.
POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
F.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
G.
Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie
for attachment to conductor or cable.
1.
H.
2.2
Marker for Tags:
Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with
diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide.
WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B.
Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1.
Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
SECTION 260553
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.
2.4
Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT
OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES"
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A.
Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.
B.
Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1
inch.
2.5
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or
interior).
B.
Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B.
Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C.
Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D.
Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
E.
Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or
cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
F.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation
and paint application.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A,
and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at
10-foot maximum intervals.
B.
Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull
box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1.
2.
Emergency Power.
Power.
SECTION 260553
Page 3 of 5
C.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the
phase.
1.
Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed
below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.
a.
b.
Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if
authorities having jurisdiction permit.
Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a
minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or
taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible
unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D.
Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use write-on tags.
E.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.
F.
Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning labels.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used
by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1.
Labeling Instructions:
a.
Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
SECTION 260553
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
b.
c.
d.
2.
Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA
or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
Equipment to Be Labeled:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated
acrylic or melamine label.
Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
Switchgear.
Switchboards.
Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.
Substations.
Enclosed switches.
Enclosed controllers.
Push-button stations.
END OF SECTION 260553
SECTION 260553
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260572 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting
capacity of circuit protective devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B.
One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C.
Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then
removes the affected portion from the system.
D.
SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
E.
Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.
1.
2.
Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a.
b.
SECTION 260572
Page 1 of 5
Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal
of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated
characteristics is satisfactory.
Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of
short-circuit study.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Short-Circuit Study Specialist.
B.
Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
B.
Short-Circuit Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
C.
Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the
study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All
elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this
professional engineer.
D.
Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE
A.
Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the
following :
1.
2.
3.
4.
ESA Inc.
Operation Technology, Inc.
Power Analytics, Corporation.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
B.
Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.
C.
Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability to
calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.
D.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output.
2.2
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
A.
Executive summary.
SECTION 260572
Page 2 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms,
and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C.
One-line diagram, showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
Cable size and lengths.
Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
D.
Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.
E.
Protective Device Evaluation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated
short-circuit duties.
For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or
higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;
verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors
at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
F.
Short-Circuit Study Input Data:
G.
Short-Circuit Study Output:
1.
Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Voltage.
Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
Equivalent impedance.
Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Voltage.
Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:
1)
2)
3)
SECTION 260572
Page 3 of 5
Based on fault-point X/R ratio.
Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.
Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.
3.
Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Voltage.
Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
Equivalent impedance.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical
basis.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to
the attention of Engineer.
For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under
the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.
For equipment that is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system
data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.
The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by
NFPA 70E.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with
recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the
field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in
charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds
NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent
protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are
consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device
submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
Power sources and ties.
For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.
Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or
nonmagnetic).
SECTION 260572
Page 4 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.2
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
A.
Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.
B.
Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.
C.
Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D.
The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E.
Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent
protective devices as follows:
1.
To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G.
The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address
the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1.
H.
Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each
of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.3
For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
Electric utility's supply termination point.
Incoming switchgear.
Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
Low-voltage switchgear.
Motor-control centers.
Control panels.
Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
Branch circuit panelboards.
Disconnect switches.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit
study.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train COTR's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.
END OF SECTION 260572
SECTION 260572
Page 5 of 5
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to
determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device
settings for selective tripping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B.
One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C.
Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then
removes the affected portion from the system.
D.
SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
E.
Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices
submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.
1.
2.
3.
Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Study and equipment evaluation reports.
Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a
qualified professional engineer.
a.
SECTION 260573
Page 1 of 9
Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal
of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated
characteristics is satisfactory.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Coordination Study Specialist.
B.
Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying
compliance with IEEE 399.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
1.
In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"
include the following:
a.
The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:
1)
2)
3)
b.
1.7
One-line diagram.
Protective device coordination study.
Time-current coordination curves.
Power system data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
B.
Coordination Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude
on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
C.
Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the
study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All
elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this
professional engineer.
D.
Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
SECTION 260573
Page 2 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ESA Inc.
Operation Technology, Inc.
Power Analytics, Corporation.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
B.
Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
C.
Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
D.
Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-currentcharacteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device
settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective
coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.
1.
Optional Features:
a.
b.
2.2
Arcing faults.
Simultaneous faults.
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS
A.
Executive summary.
B.
Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms
and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
C.
One-line diagram, showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
Cable size and lengths.
Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.
D.
Study Input Data:
E.
Short-Circuit Study:
1.
Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
SECTION 260573
Page 3 of 9
Voltage.
Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.
c.
d.
2.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
Equivalent impedance.
Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Voltage.
Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:
1)
2)
3)
3.
Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
F.
Voltage.
Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
Equivalent impedance.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical
basis.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
Protective Device Coordination Study:
1.
Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use
manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent
protective devices when available.
a.
Phase and Ground Relays:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
Device tag.
Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup
value.
Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.
Circuit Breakers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
G.
Based on fault-point X/R ratio.
Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.
Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.
Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).
Adjustable time-current characteristic.
Adjustable instantaneous pickup.
Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.
Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.
Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to
achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists
between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.
Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where
the power source is local generation. Show the following information:
SECTION 260573
Page 4 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
1.
2.
3.
4.
Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system
covered.
Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or
asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.
Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if
applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.
Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
5.
6.
Power utility's overcurrent protective device.
Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays.
Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total
clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.
d.
Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's
tolerance bands.
e.
Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault
protection curves.
f.
Cables and conductors damage curves.
g.
Ground-fault protective devices.
h.
Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.
i.
Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.
j.
The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.
Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective
operation is achieved.
Comments and recommendations for system improvements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1.
3.2
Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved
prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY
A.
Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination time
intervals.
B.
Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.
C.
The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D.
The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E.
Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as
follows:
1.
To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
SECTION 260573
Page 5 of 9
F.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G.
Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1.
Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
H.
Inrush current when first energized.
Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is
specified for that transformer.
Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.
Motor Protection:
1.
2.
Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70.
Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to IEEE 620.
I.
Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping
time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
J.
Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations
and to IEEE 242.
K.
The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address
the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.
1.
L.
Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and
single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
M.
For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as
defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.
Electric utility's supply termination point.
Switchgear.
Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
Low-voltage switchgear.
Motor-control centers.
Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
Branch circuit panelboards.
Protective Device Evaluation:
1.
2.
Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.
Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to withstand
short-circuit stresses.
SECTION 260573
Page 6 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.3
LOAD-FLOW AND VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY
A.
Perform a load-flow and voltage-drop study to determine the steady-state loading profile of the
system. Analyze power system performance two times as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on full-load currents.
Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on 80 percent of the design capacity of the
load buses.
Prepare the load-flow and voltage-drop analysis and report to show power system
components that are overloaded, or might become overloaded; show bus voltages that
are less than as prescribed by NFPA 70.
POWER SYSTEM DATA
A.
Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined
by NFPA 70E.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a
guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 241 and IEEE 551 for the amount of detail
required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision
and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its
representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing
Level III certification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
Electrical power utility impedance at the service.
Power sources and ties.
Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.
Full-load current of all loads.
Voltage level at each bus.
For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.
For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and
impedance.
For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
Maximum demands from service meters.
SECTION 260573
Page 7 of 9
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with
tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
3.5
Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting
and stopping.
Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush
current, and overload capability.
Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of
start, and thermal-damage curve.
Generator thermal-damage curve.
Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.
Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere
or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,
and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio
for overcurrent relays.
Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes
rms symmetrical.
FIELD ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by
the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service
division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract
portion.
B.
Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit
studies.
C.
Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds
NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.
1.
3.6
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform
NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train COTR's maintenance personnel in the
following:
1.
Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and
emergency modes.
SECTION 260573
Page 8 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.
3.
Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions,
purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for
interpreting the time-current coordination curves.
Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.
END OF SECTION 260573
SECTION 260573
Page 9 of 9
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 260574 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard distance
and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical
equipment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not
otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
B.
One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the
course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used
therein.
C.
Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then
removes the affected portion from the system.
D.
SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.
E.
Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to
the wiring system of the premises served.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B.
Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system protective
devices submittals. Submittals may be in digital form.
1.
2.
Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
a.
SECTION 260574
Page 1 of 6
Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution
equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in
equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal
of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated
characteristics is satisfactory.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist.
B.
Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with
IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the
equipment manuals.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by COTR's
personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.
B.
Arc-Flash Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer
software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on
electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1.
The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional
engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development
Professional certification.
C.
Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the
study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where
Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and
control of this professional engineer.
D.
Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and
capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member
company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS
A.
Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
ESA Inc.
Operation Technology, Inc.
Power Analytics, Corporation.
SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.
Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.
SECTION 260574
Page 2 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
2.2
Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the
capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in
IEEE 399.
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENT
A.
Executive summary.
B.
Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.
C.
One-line diagram, showing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Protective device designations and ampere ratings.
Cable size and lengths.
Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.
Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.
Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.
D.
Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.
E.
Short-Circuit Study Output:
1.
Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the
following for each overcurrent device location:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
F.
Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
G.
2.3
Voltage.
Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.
Fault-point X/R ratio.
No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.
Equivalent impedance.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a symmetrical
basis.
Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.
Arcing fault magnitude.
Protective device clearing time.
Duration of arc.
Arc-flash boundary.
Working distance.
Incident energy.
Hazard risk category.
Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.
Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of
terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.
ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Produce a
3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included
in the analysis.
SECTION 260574
Page 3 of 6
B.
The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD,"
and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Location designation.
Nominal voltage.
Flash protection boundary.
Hazard risk category.
Incident energy.
Working distance.
Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.
Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study only
after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that
have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.
SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY
A.
Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.
B.
Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.
C.
Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.
D.
The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.
E.
Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective devices as
follows:
1.
To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.
F.
Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and
alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
G.
The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous
motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase
ac systems.
H.
Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and
single line-to-ground fault at each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Electric utility's supply termination point.
Switchgear.
Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.
Low-voltage switchgear.
Motor-control centers.
Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.
Branch circuit panelboards.
SECTION 260574
Page 4 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.3
ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.
B.
Use the short-circuit study output and the field-verified settings of the overcurrent devices.
C.
Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size.
1.
2.
The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and
shall assume no motor load.
The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility and shall
assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.
D.
Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical
distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.
E.
Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations
F.
Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated
arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.
G.
Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when
performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall
take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or
decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as
follows:
1.
2.
H.
Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows:
1.
2.
I.
3.4
Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three to five
cycles.
Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed to match
the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions from permanent
magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).
When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure.
When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work location.
Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time.
maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.
Cap
POWER SYSTEM DATA
A.
Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.
1.
2.
3.
Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call
discrepancies to the attention of Architect.
For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action
submittals and information submittals for this Project.
For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution
system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and
engineers.
SECTION 260574
Page 5 of 6
B.
Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. Comply with
recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be
acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of
the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its
representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing
Level III certification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.5
Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved
in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags
that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective
device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.
Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.
Power sources and ties.
For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,
impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift.
For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and
impedance.
For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of
breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker
settings.
Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated
kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.
For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios,
potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.
Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and
conductor material.
Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material
(magnetic or nonmagnetic).
Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and
metallic shield performance parameters.
LABELING
A.
Apply one arc-flash label for 208-V ac panelboards and disconnects and for each of the
following locations affected by new work:
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Low-voltage switchboard.
Switchgear.
Medium-voltage switch.
APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS
A.
3.7
Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-Flash
Study Specialist.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train COTR's maintenance personnel in the potential
arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the
arc-flash warning labels.
END OF SECTION 260574
SECTION 260574
Page 6 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 261116 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes indoor unitized substations, consisting of the following parts:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Primary incoming section.
Transformer.
Secondary distribution section.
Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for requirements of terminating cables in
incoming section of substation.
Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study" for short-circuit
rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Dimensioned plans and elevations showing major components and features.
One-line diagram.
List of materials.
Nameplate legends.
Size and number of bus bars and current rating for each bus, including mains and
branches of phase, neutral, and ground buses.
Short-time and short-circuit current ratings of secondary unit substations and
components.
Ratings of individual protective devices.
C.
Time-Current Characteristic Curves: For overcurrent protective devices.
D.
Primary Fuses: Submit recommendations and size calculations.
SECTION 261116
Page 1 of 7
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
Dimensioned concrete base, outline of secondary unit substation, and conduit entries.
Location of structural supports for structure-supported raceways.
Location of lighting fixtures, sprinkler piping and heads, ducts, and diffusers.
B.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
C.
Product Certificates: For secondary unit substations, signed by product manufacturer.
D.
Factory test reports.
E.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For secondary unit substations and accessories to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in
29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with IEEE C2, “National Electrical Safety Code.”
E.
Comply with IEEE C37.121, “American National Standard for Switchgear Unit Substations.”
F.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
1.8
Obtain secondary unit substation through one source from a single
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate delivery of secondary unit substations to allow movement into designated space.
B.
Store secondary unit substation components protected from weather and so condensation will
not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written
instructions if required.
SECTION 261116
Page 2 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
C.
1.9
Handle secondary unit substation components according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Use factory-installed lifting provisions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B.
Interruption of Existing electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
COTR or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
C.
Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions, except for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.10
Notify COTR no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR's written permission.
Exposure to significant solar radiation.
Altitudes above 3300 feet.
Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust.
Exposure to explosive environments.
Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt spray,
and dripping water.
Exposure to excessively high or low temperatures.
Unusual transportation or storage conditions.
Unusual grounding resistance conditions.
Unusual space limitations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of secondary unit substations with other construction that
penetrates floors and ceilings, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, and fire-suppression-system components.
B.
Coordinate size and location of existing concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.
C.
Substation components shall be provided with maximum dimensions as indicated on the
Drawings. Any deviations from substation layout on the Drawings shall be coordinated with
existing conditions and approved by the project electrical engineer. The layout indicated on the
Drawings represents the following dimensions for substation equipment sections:
a.
Primary interrupter switch: 3’-0” wide x 3’-2” deep x 7’-6” high.
b.
Dry-type transformer: 4’-0 wide x 3’-2’ deep x 8’-4” high.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Cutler-Hammer.
2.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
SECTION 261116
Page 3 of 7
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Indoor Unit Arrangement: Separate secondary distribution equipment connected with busway.
Custom fabricated to allow for equipment arrangement indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color, including under
surfaces treated with corrosion-resistant undercoating.
2.3
INCOMING SECTIONS
A.
Primary Incoming Sections: Enclosed, air-interrupter, dual primary switches in duplex
configuration to accept two feeders. Terminal assembly with adequate space for bottom
incoming feeders.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Three pole, single throw, dead front, metal enclosed, fused interrupter switches with
manual stored energy operator, with fuses mounted on a single frame, complying with
IEEE C37.20.3.
Key interlocking system to prevent fuse access door from being opened unless switch is
open.
Key interlock switch between two fused interrupter switches to prohibit paralleling of two
primary feeders and to create a “make before break” switching arrangement.
Phase Barriers: Located between blades and fuses of each phase, designed for easy
removal, allows visual inspection of switch components when barrier is in place.
Window: Permits viewing switch-blade positions when door is closed.
Accessory Set: Tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test,
inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include fuse-handling tool as recommended by
switchgear manufacturer.
Continuous-Current Rating: 600 A.
Short-Circuit Rating:
a.
b.
c.
9.
Short-time momentary asymmetrical fault rating of 40 kA.
3-second symmetrical rating of 25-kA RMS.
Fault close asymmetrical rating of 40 kA.
Fuses: Sizes recommended by secondary unit substation manufacturer, considering fan
cooling, temperature-rise specification, and cycle loading. Comply with the following:
a.
b.
c.
Current-limiting type, rated for not less than 50-kA RMS symmetrical currentinterrupting capacity.
Indicator integral with each fuse to show when it has blown.
Spares: Include three fuses in use and three spare fuses in storage clips in each
switch.
B.
Unitized Power Center: Fused interrupter switches to be manufactured as part of a unitized
power center assembly to allow factory fabricated close coupling to adjacent dry-type medium
voltage transformer.
C.
Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type, with
ratings as indicated, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any
disconnecting device.
2.4
DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMER SECTION
A.
Description:
IEEE C57.12.01, IEEE C57.12.50, NEMA ST 20, and dry-type, 2-winding,
secondary unit substation transformer.
SECTION 261116
Page 4 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated, vacuum-pressure, impregnated type and with insulation system
rated at 220 deg C with an 80 deg C average winding temperature rise above a maximum
ambient temperature of 40 deg C.
C.
Cooling System:
IEEE C57.12.01.
D.
Winding material: Aluminum
E.
Insulation Materials: IEEE C57.12.01, rated 220 deg C.
F.
Insulation Temperature Rise: 150 deg C, maximum rise above 40 deg C.
G.
Primary Basic Impulse Level: 60 kV.
H.
Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: 4 nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary
voltage.
I.
High-Temperature Alarm:
contacts for remote alarm.
J.
Unitized Power Center: Dry-type transformer to be manufactured as part of a unitized power
center assembly to allow factory fabricated close coupling to adjacent primary switches and
secondary distribution section.
2.5
Class AA/FA,
air
cooled
with
forced-air
rating,
complying
with
Sensor at transformer with local audible and visual alarm and
SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION
A.
Secondary Distribution:
"Switchboards."
B.
Unitized Power Center: Secondary distribution section to be manufactured as part of a unitized
power center assembly to allow factory fabricated close coupling to adjacent dry-type medium
voltage transformer.
2.6
Low-voltage
switchboard
as
specified
in
Section 262413
IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Compartment Nameplates:
Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each
compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are
specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Mimic bus: Provide laminated-plastic mimic bus showing the electrical bus and connection
arrangement within the equipment.
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90. Conduct switchgear
and switchboard tests according to ANSI C37.51.
B.
Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each secondary unit substation:
1.
Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
SECTION 261116
Page 5 of 7
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ratios on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.
Polarity and phase relation on the rated voltage connection.
No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
Applied potential.
Induced potential.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit
substations and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:
1.
2.
Existing conduit entries and duct-bank stub-ups comply with layout requirements as
indicated on the Drawings.
Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders will
have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for secondary unit
substation installation.
D.
Verify that ground connections are in place. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at
secondary unit substation location. Utilize existing electrical room ground bus for all substation
grounding connections.
E.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install unitized, secondary unit substation components on existing concrete base.
B.
Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written
instructions and NFPA 70. Install substation components in locations as indicated on the
Drawings.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for secondary unit substations,
including key interlocking, control sequences, elementary single-line diagram, and emergency
procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic
plastic. Mount on front of secondary unit substation.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
SECTION 261116
Page 6 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.5
CLEANING
A.
3.6
After completing equipment installation and before energizing, inspect unit components.
Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish. Vacuum interiors of secondary unit substation sections.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests
and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test according to
NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.
After installing secondary unit substation but before primary is energized, verify that
grounding system at the substation tested at the specified value or less.
After installing secondary unit substation and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
a.
3.7
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
FOLLOW-UP SERVICE
A.
Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, if requested by COTR, but not
more than six months after Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:
1.
2.
During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by COTR, perform seven days of
three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of each secondary unit substation.
Use voltmeters with calibration traceable to the National Institute of Science and
Technology standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch per hour. Voltage
unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage
from the nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during the test period, is
unacceptable.
Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective
action, as appropriate:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
3.8
Adjust transformer taps.
Rebalance loads.
Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.
Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action has been performed, until satisfactory
results are obtained.
Report: Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action
taken.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train COTR's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
END OF SECTION 261116
SECTION 261116
Page 7 of 7
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 262413 - SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.
Transient voltage suppression devices.
Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
Instrumentation.
Control power.
Accessory components and features.
Identification.
Mimic bus.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage
suppression device, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensions and
manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
accessories, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.4
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Include descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation
and isolation.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent
protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;
include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
Include diagram and details of proposed mimic bus.
Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
SECTION 262413
Page 1 of 8
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include
selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and
trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the
Workplace.”
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor:
testing.
Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Comply with NEMA PB 2, “Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.”
F.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
G.
Comply with UL 891, “Switchboards.”
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery
path.
B.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and prevent
condensation.
C.
Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures
to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
SECTION 262413
Page 2 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
B.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
C.
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, usual service conditions, as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Ambient temperatures within limits specified.
Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
COTR or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.9
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
Notify COTR no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR's written permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in Workplace.”
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without complying with requirements
for temporary electrical service.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with
concrete.
C.
Switchboard components shall be provided with maximum dimensions as indicated on the
Drawings. Any deviations from switchboard layout on the Drawings shall be coordinated with
existing conditions and approved by the project electrical engineer. The layout indicated on the
Drawings represents the following dimensions for switchboard equipment sections:
a.
Switchboard distribution section: 3’-9” wide x 3’-0” deep x 7’-6” high.
b.
Switchboard main circuit breaker section: 3’-0” wide x 3’-0” deep x 7’-6” high.
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 262413
Page 3 of 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Rear-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted in separate section.
Branch Devices: Panel mounted in separate section.
Sections front aligned.
Assignment as indicated on the drawings.
C.
Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.
D.
Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish
over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.
E.
Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
F.
Insulation and isolation for main bus of main section and main and vertical buses of feeder
sections.
G.
Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Coordinate with secondary unit substation
transformer as specified in Section 261116 "Secondary Unit Substations."
H.
Removable, Hinged Rear Doors and Compartment Covers: Secured by standard bolts, for
access to rear interior of switchboard.
I.
Hinged Front Panels:
compartments.
J.
Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, with tinplated aluminum or copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
Load Terminals: Insulated, rigidly braced, runback bus extensions, of same material as
through buses, equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit conductors.
Provide load terminals for future circuit-breaker positions at full-ampere rating of circuitbreaker position.
Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with
mechanical connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors. For busway
feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and
support cable at intervals in vertical run.
Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of
switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both
ends.
Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,
equipped with mechanical connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus
extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.
Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
SECTION 262413
Page 4 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
K.
Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
L.
Bus-Bar Insulation: Factory-applied, flame-retardant, tape wrapping of individual bus bars or
flame-retardant, spray-applied insulation. Minimum insulation temperature rating of 105 deg C.
2.2
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Surge Protection Device Description: IEEE C62.41-compliant, integrally mounted, bolt-on,
solid-state, parallel-connected, modular (with field-replaceable modules type, with sine-wave
tracking suppression and filtering modules, UL 1449, third edition, short-circuit current rating
matching or exceeding the switchboard short-circuit rating, and with the following features and
accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity.
Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring.
Integral disconnect switch.
Redundant suppression circuits.
Redundant replaceable modules.
Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus.
LED indicator lights for power and protection status.
Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed.
Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of system operation. Contacts shall reverse position on failure of
any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate with
building power monitoring and control system.
Six-digit, transient-event counter set to totalize transient surges.
C.
Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 120 kA per mode/240 kA per phase
D.
Withstand Capabilities: 12,000 IEEE C62.41, Category C3 (10 kA), 8-by-20-mic.sec. surges
with less than 5 percent change in clamping voltage.
E.
Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120-V, three-phase,
four-wire circuits shall be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120.
Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
SECTION 262413
Page 5 of 8
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
B.
Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit
breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
material.
Fixed circuit-breaker mounting.
Two-step, stored-energy closing.
Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip
indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:
a.
Instantaneous trip.
b.
Long- and short-time time adjustments.
Control Voltage: 120-V ac.
INSTRUMENTATION
A.
Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:
1.
Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units
larger than 3 kVA.
B.
Refer to Specification Section 262713 "Electricity Metering” for instrumentation requirements.
2.5
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
2.6
Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective
device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with
one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or
physically damaged.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
SECTION 262413
Page 6 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B.
Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch nominal thickness.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete
base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.
C.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
D.
Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic.
Mount on front of switchboards.
E.
Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.
F.
Install overcurrent
instrumentation.
G.
Comply with NECA 1, “Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting.”
3.3
protective
devices,
transient
voltage
suppression
devices,
and
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
B.
Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying
with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
C.
Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each
meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D.
Mimic Bus: Entire single-line switchboard bus work, as depicted on factory record drawing, on
an engraved laminated-plastic (Gravoply) nameplate.
1.
E.
Nameplate: At least 0.0625-inch-thick laminated plastic (Gravoply), located at eye level
on front cover of the switchboard incoming service section.
Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in switchboard sections to which they are applied.
Produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchboard components and connections.
SECTION 262413
Page 7 of 8
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.5
Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 260573 "Overcurrent
Protective Device Coordination Study."
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train COTR's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards,
overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram
microprocessor-based trip, monitoring, and communication units.
END OF SECTION 262413
SECTION 262413
Page 8 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section Includes:
1.
Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
DEFINITIONS
A.
SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
B.
SPD: Surge protection device..
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,
transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions
and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,
and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.
Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.
Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B.
Field Quality-Control Reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.
SECTION 262416
Page 1 of 6
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.7
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device that allows adjustments.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
Circuit Breakers: Two spares for each panelboard.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C.
Comply with NEMA PB 1, “Panelboards.”
D.
Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”
1.9
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.
B.
Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
1.
Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary
HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
COTR or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
3.
Notify ArchitectCOTR no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of
electric service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR's written permission.
Comply with NFPA 70E, “Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.”
SECTION 262416
Page 2 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
1.11
A.
1.12
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A.
Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.
1.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a.
2.
3.
4.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match
box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with hinged door-in-door design
to allow access to panel interior without the use of tools.
Finishes:
a.
b.
5.
B.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in
protective cover.
metal frame with transparent
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes, refer to drawings.
1.
2.
3.
Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.
Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.
Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
SECTION 262416
Page 3 of 6
Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat
and thermosetting topcoat.
Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:
1.
2.
C.
Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 .
D.
Future Devices:
Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary
appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
E.
Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating:
current available at terminals.
2.2
Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.
C.
Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing
adjacent units.
D.
Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Provide doorin-door design to allow access to panel interior without the use of tools.
2.3
DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers:
following :
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.
Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.
Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
Application Listing:
Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity
discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
SECTION 262416
Page 4 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
2.4
ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A.
Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and
switchboard class relays.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.
C.
Mount top of trim 78 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.
E.
Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.
1.
Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
F.
Install filler plates in unused spaces.
G.
Comply with NECA 1, “Standard Practice for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.”
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate COTR's final room
designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C.
Panelboard Nameplates:
Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SECTION 262416
Page 5 of 6
D.
3.4
Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each circuit.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA
Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards
included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 262416
SECTION 262416
Page 6 of 6
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes equipment for electricity metering by COTR.
DEFINITIONS
A.
KY Pulse: Term used by the metering industry to describe a method of measuring consumption
of electricity that is based on a relay opening and closing in response to the rotation of the disk
in the meter.
B.
PC: Personal computer.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For electricity-metering equipment.
1.
2.
1.5
Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. Identify terminals and wiring
designations and color-codes to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
Indicate recommended types, wire sizes, and circuiting arrangements for field-installed
wiring, and show circuit protection features.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation
and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application and operating software documentation.
Software licenses.
Software service agreement.
Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for software
and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal.
SECTION 262713
Page 1 of 4
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Receive, store, and handle modular meter center according to NECA 400, “Standard for
Installing and Maintaining Switchboards.”
COORDINATION
A.
Electrical Service Connections: Coordinate with campus utility system and components they
furnish as follows:
1.
2.
1.10
Comply with requirements of campus utility system providing electrical power services.
Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services, including provision for
electricity-metering components.
SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A.
Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two
years.
B.
Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program
software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.
Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised
licenses for use of software.
1.
Provide 30 days' notice to COTR to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
COTR to upgrade his computer equipment if necessary.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY COTR
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
E-Mon; a division of Hunt Power.
Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
National Meter Industries.
Osaki Meter Sales, Inc.
Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
General Requirements for COTR's Meters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comply with UL 1244, “Electrical and Electronic Measuring and Testing Equipment.”
Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 minimum, with hasp for padlocking or sealing.
Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72
hours, minimum.
SECTION 262713
Page 2 of 4
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park (NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final Construction Document
- 6 August 2013
5.
Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum
range and accuracy for meters indicated for this application.
a.
6.
7.
C.
2.
3.
Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with
voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.
Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch high, indicating accumulative
kilowatt-hours and current kilowatt load.
Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour in a
nonvolatile memory, until reset.
Display: Digital electromechanical counter, indicating accumulative kilowatt-hours.
Kilowatt-hour/Demand Meter: Electronic three-phase meter, measuring electricity use and
demand. Demand shall be integrated over a 15-minute interval.
1.
2.
E.
Current-Transformer Cabinet:
Listed or recommended by metering equipment
manufacturer for use with sensors indicated.
Building Automation System (BAS) Interface: One digital KY pulse to a user-definable
increment of energy measurement. Match signal to BAS input and arrange to convey the
instantaneous, integrated, demand level measured by meter to provide data for
processing and possible programmed demand control action by destination system.
Kilowatt-hour Meter: Electronic three-phase meter, measuring electricity used.
1.
D.
Type: Split core.
Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with
voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.
Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch high, indicating accumulative
kilowatt-hours, current time and date, current demand, and historic peak demand, and
time and date of historic peak demand. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour and historic
peak demand in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.
Data Transmission Cable: Transmit KY pulse data over Class 1 control-circuit conductors in
raceway. Comply with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1, “Standard Practice for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Construction.”
B.
Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
1.
Series Combination Warning Label:
NFPA 70.
SECTION 262713
Page 3 of 4
Self-adhesive type, with text as required by
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by
metered feeder.
Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition.
Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable
meter indication. Use test-load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe
operation.
Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity
used, based on test-load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply
voltage at test-load connection. Record test results.
C.
Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 262713
SECTION 262713
Page 4 of 4
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components VC NZP - 6 August 2013 - QEA
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Preparing subgrades for walks, pavements, lawns and grasses and exterior plants.
Excavating and backfilling for structures.
Subbase course for concrete walks, pavements.
Subbase and base course for asphalt paving.
Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits
for buried utility structures.
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation Photographic Documentation"
for recording preexcavation and earthwork progress.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities,
and support facilities.
Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and
electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.
Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping[ and stockpiling] topsoil, and removal of
above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.
Division 32 Section "Plants" for planting bed establishment and tree and shrub pit
excavation and planting.
Retain this Article if unit prices are required for rock excavation or if authorized additional
excavation is anticipated.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.
1.
2.
B.
Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to
support sides of pipe.
Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.
Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 1 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
C.
Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.
D.
Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.
E.
Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary
flow of pore water.
F.
Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and
dimensions indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation
and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions.
Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length.
Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated
lines and dimensions without direction by COTR. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by COTR, shall be without additional compensation.
G.
Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
H.
Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material that exceed[1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or[ 3/4 cu. yd.for footing, trench, and
pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following
in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,
when permitted:
1.
2.
Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic
excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at
not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,090 lbf
and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf measured according to SAE J-1179.
Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 210-hp
flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a generalpurpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.
I.
Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders
of rock material [3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of
100 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to
ASTM D 1586.
J.
Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical
and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or
below the ground surface.
K.
Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt
pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a
cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.
L.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or
backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
M.
Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground
services within buildings.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 2 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Each type of plastic warning tape.
Geotextile.
Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.
Geofoam.
B.
Samples: 12-by-12-inch Sample of subdrainage geotextile.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
1.
2.
D.
1.5
Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and] borrow soil material
proposed for fill and backfill.
Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557 for each on-site
and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.
Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction
and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according
to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according
to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.
B.
Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 3 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not
available from excavations.
B.
Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM
AASHTO M 145 Soil Classification Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3, or a combination of
these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.
C.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT
according to ASTM D 2487 A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145,
or a combination of these groups.
1.
Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of
optimum moisture content at time of compaction.
D.
Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
E.
Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
F.
Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
G.
Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed
stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch
sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
H.
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed
gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch
sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.
I.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and
natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.
J.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or manufactured sand.
K.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 4 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously
inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:
B.
Detectable Warning Tape:
Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape
manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and
4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up
to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Red: Electric.
Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
Orange: Telephone and other communications.
Blue: Water systems.
Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork
operations.
B.
Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil,
debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing."
C.
Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31
Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations.
D.
Provide protective insulating materials to protect subgrades and foundation soils against
freezing temperatures or frost.
3.2
EXPLOSIVES
A.
3.3
Explosives: Do not use explosives.
EXCAVATION, GENERAL
A.
Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of
surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include
rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time
will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 5 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
1.
2.
If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials
and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.
Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent
construction without exceeding the following dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;
underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with
soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.
a.
4.
Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not
classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and
subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without
exceeding the following dimensions:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.4
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings.
12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings.
6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade.
Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without
forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.
6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or
42 inches wide.
EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A.
3.5
Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades.
EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A.
Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.
1.
B.
Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below
frost line.
Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or
conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than
top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 6 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
C.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of
pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels
of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp
objects along trench subgrade.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for
bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.
1.
3.6
For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multipleduct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an
undisturbed subgrade.
For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to
support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand
backfill.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding
bearing material to allow for bedding course.
SUBGRADE INSPECTION
A.
Notify COTR when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B.
If COTR determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with
compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
C.
Proof-roll subgrade pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets
and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.
1.
2.
3.
Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction[, repeating proof-rolling in direction
perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.
Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15
tons.
Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as
determined by COTRt, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.
D.
Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract
provisions.
E.
Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or
construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.
3.7
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION
A.
Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of
concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean
concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi may be used when approved by
Architect.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 7 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
1.
3.8
Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by
Architect.
STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.
Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
1.
3.9
Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
BACKFILL
A.
Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.10
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing,
waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.
Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.
Testing and inspecting underground utilities.
Removing concrete formwork.
Removing trash and debris.
Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A.
Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings,
and bodies of conduits.
C.
Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with
satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete.”
D.
Provide 4-inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches
below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a
minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase.
E.
Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any
dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.
1.
Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both
sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement
of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 8 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
F.
Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing.
G.
Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.
H.
Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches
below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.11
SOIL FILL
A.
Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill
material will bond with existing material.
B.
Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.12
A.
Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1.
2.
3.13
Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material.
Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.
Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.
Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.
Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that
exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified
dry unit weight.
COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS
A.
Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B.
Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and
uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight
according to ASTM D 698, ASTM D 1557:
1.
Under structures, concrete curb, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and
recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material
at 95 percent.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 9 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
2.
3.
4.
3.14
A.
GRADING
General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply
with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface
tolerances.
Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish
subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
3.15
Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each
layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.
Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and
compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.
For utility trenches and along demolished concrete ditch area, compact each layer of
initial and final backfill soil material at 85 percent.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch.
Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2.
SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES
A.
Place subbase and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place subbase and base course under pavements and walks as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Install separation geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement.
Shape subbase and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
Place subbase and base course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a
single layer.
Place subbase and base] course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers
of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick.
Compact subbase and base] course at optimum moisture content to required grades,
lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit
weight according to[ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1557.
Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of
maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 ASTM D 1557.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 10 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
3.16
DRAINAGE COURSE
A.
Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.
B.
On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.17
Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written
instructions, overlapping sides and ends.
Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.
Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal
thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not
less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering
testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.
B.
Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with
subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with
requirements.
C.
Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed
to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing
subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when
approved by Architect.
D.
Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167,
ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following
locations and frequencies:
1.
2.
3.
E.
3.18
A.
Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill
layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no
case fewer than 3 tests.
Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100
feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each
150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests.
When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of
compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth
required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.
PROTECTION
Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep
free of trash and debris.
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 11 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications :Final CD
- 8 August 2013
B.
Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed
surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1.
C.
Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,
backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1.
3.19
Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape
and recompact.
Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,
and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil,
trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.
B.
Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property.
Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.
1.
Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally
dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 312000
SECTION 31 20 00
Page 12 of 12
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
SECTION 329300 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Plants.
Planting soils.
Tree stabilization.
Erosion control.
.Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, rough grading and blending of
planting soil into the disturbed and undisturbed surface soil and/or subsoil
DEFINITIONS
A.
Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B.
Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were
grown, with ball size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for
type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced
with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.
C.
Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and
placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended
by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
D.
Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting
or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root
spread according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
E.
Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with
a well- established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball
when removed from
SECTION 32 93 00
Page
1 of 8 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during
shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.
F.
Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves,
twigs, and detritus.
G.
Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown inground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag.
Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type
and size of plant.
H.
Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
I.
Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or
sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
J.
Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating
a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and
molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,
defoliant, or desiccant.
K.
Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants,
animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents
(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
L.
Planting Area: Areas to be planted.
M.
Planting Soil:
Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place
surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and
perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
N.
Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees,
shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous
vegetation.
O.
Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where
the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the
stem or trunk.
P.
Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.
Q.
Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top
surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
R.
Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic
matter and soil organisms.
S.
Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project
site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as
urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 2 of 8 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
Notify Construction Manager or Owner no fewer than two days in advance of
proposed interruption of each service or utility.
Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Construction
Manager’s or Owner’s written permission.
2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MULCHES
A.
Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees
and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Type: Premium Grade shredded Red Oak. Basis of Design: Grant County mulch.
Size Range: 3-inches maximum, ½-inch minimum
Color: Natural.
EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
A.
Jute Mesh: A degradable material composed of processed natural or polymer yarns woven into
a matrix, manufactured or fabricated into rolls designed to reduce soil erosion and assist in the
growth, establishment and protection of vegetation
1.
Machine-made mats in rolled strips.
2.
Minimum width: 48-inches.
3.
Average open area: 60-70 percent.
4.
Minimum strands per foot in each direction: 14 to 20.
5.
Minimum weight per square yard: 0.90 to 1.2 pounds.
6.
Physical requirements in Table A below:
Table
A
Number
Of
Nets
1
Net
Type
Matrix
Organic
Unbleached
and Undyed
Woven Jute
Maximum
"C"
Factor 1
0.25
Minimum
Sheer
Stress 2
1.5
Functional
Longevity
(months)
12
Minimum
Tensile
Strength 3
50
Notes:
1 Universal Soil Loss Equation (USLE) C-Factor for a 1.5:1 (H:V) unvegetated slope.
2 lb/ft2 under ASTM D 6460.
3 lb/ft under ASTM D 5035.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 3 of 8 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
B.
Fasteners:
1. Stakes must be manufactured from completely biodegradable substance derived from
renewable agricultural resources leaving no residuals in the ground. Stakes must be Tshaped with a minimum 1.2-inch hooked head and a 6-inch leg with serrations or barbs on
its body.
2.3
PESTICIDES
A.
General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as
required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless
authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective):
Effective for controlling the
germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch
layer.
C.
Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth
that has already germinated.
2.4
TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Upright Stakes:
Rough-sawn, sound, new softwood with pressure-preservative
treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by
appropriate length, pointed at one end.
Guy stakes: Rough-sawn, sound hardwood stakes 1 by 1 inch nominal no less than
16 inches long, pointed at one end.
Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand,
twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter.
Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Antidesiccant:
Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for
trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Tree Guards: Contractor shall provide tree guards for deer protection of new trees. Guards are
to be four- inch diameter, black rigid HDPE plastic tubes ¾-inch x ¾-inch open mesh for
protection from deer, as supplied by A.M. Leonard BG48, or COTR approved equal.
1.
Tree guards will become the property of the Owner.
C.
Watering Bags: Contractor provide slow release 20-gallon capacity watering bags for new
trees, as manufactured by TreeGator or COTR approved equal.
At the end of the
maintenance period Contractor is to remove watering bags .
D.
Mycorrhizal Fungi: Dry, granular inoculant containing at least 5300 spores per lb of vesiculararbuscular mycorrhizal fungi and 95 million spores per lb of ectomycorrhizal fungi, 33
percent hydrogel, and a maximum of 5.5 percent inert material.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 4 of 8 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and
existing plants from damage.
B.
Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of
soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C.
Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over
trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling,
and transportation.
1.
D.
3.2
If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at
nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting.
Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to
protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation.
INSTALLATION OF EROSION CONTROL
A.
Install Jute Mesh erosion control in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations as soon
as COTR has accepted final grade.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Two layers are required on slopes 2:1 or greater.
One layer is required on slopes less than 2:1 to 5:1 unless area is subject to a
concentration of water erosion, such as, a swale, where two layers are required.
When two layers are required, offset the second layer half the diagonal distance
between the square openings.
Pin mesh to soil per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Place a double layer of jute mesh on the front face of the saucer built-up on the downhill
side of trees planted on the hillside.
Erosion control will remain in place and become the property of the Owner.
TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING
A.
Perform all pruning under the supervision of a certified arborist.
B.
Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. C. Prune, thin, and
shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by COTR.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 5 of 8 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
C.
Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional
horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by COTR, do not cut tree
leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain
natural character.
D.
Do not apply pruning paint to wounds.
3.4
TREE STABILIZATION
A.
Tree guying and staking is optional. However, the contractor is responsible for keeping the
tree in a plumb position for the entire warranty period.
B.
Install trunk stabilization as follows if deemed necessary by the Contractor.
1.
Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less
than 2- inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two
stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled
excavation and to extend one- third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and
space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses.
Use two stakes for trees up to 12 feet high and 2-1/2 inches or less in caliper; three
stakes for trees less than 14 feet high and up to 4 inches in caliper. Space stakes equally
around trees.
Support trees with two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie
webbing at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of
tree.
2.
3.
C.
Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches
(in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30
inches long, driven to grade.
1.
Site-Fabricated Staking-and-Guying Method:
a.
b.
c.
2.
D.
For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at
least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle for each guy wire and tighten
securely.
Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and
reaching to turnbuckle Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
Support trees with strands of cable or multiple strands of tie wire, connected to
the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk and
reaching to turnbuckle. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized and
positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Root-Ball Stabilization: Install at- or below-grade stabilization system to secure each new
planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Proprietary Root-Ball Stabilization Device:
Install root-ball stabilization system
sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 6 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
3.5
PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A.
Install erosion control devises before mulching according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches
and secure seams with uncoated metal pins.
B.
Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1.
3.6
Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 2-inch average thickness of organic mulch
extending 12 inches beyond edge of individual planting pit or trench] [and] [over whole
surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch
within 3 inches [6 inches of trunks or stems.
PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
Begin plant maintenance immediately on the first day of planting and continue as required
until final acceptance at the end of the Warranty period. Perform needed maintenance promptly.
B.
Perform all tree maintenance under the supervision of a certified arborist.
C.
Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring
planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades
or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable
plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
D.
Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.
Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
E.
Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and
pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to
minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls
such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
F.
Install tree watering bags after tree is installed. “Fill with potable water and refill when bags are
down to approximately one-third full throughout the maintenance period.
1.
Remove watering bags at the end of the maintenance period.
G.
Install tree guards on all trees up to 4-inch in caliper to a height of 8-feet. Cut out an opening
in the slit for the lowest branch and install smaller sections as needed to reach the required
height.
3.7
PESTICIDE APPLICATION
A.
Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with
authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.
Coordinate
applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before
each application is performed.
B.
Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 7 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 6 August 2013
areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded
areas.
C.
3.8
Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat
already- germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly
condition.
B.
Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors
and trades.
Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace
damaged plantings.
C.
3.16
A.
After installation and before planting completion remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie
tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.
DISPOSAL
Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and
debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 329300
SECTION 32 93 00
Page 8 of 8
Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
SECTION 33 05 23.13 - UTILITY HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
PART 1
1.1
A.
GENERAL
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Section includes requirements for Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) of High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for electrical conduit.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Experience: Actively engaged in horizontal directional drilling for minimum of 3 years. B.
Field supervisory personnel: Experienced in the performance of work and tasks as stated
herein for minimum of 3 years.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for information only.
1. Presentation of similar experience in the last 3 years.
2. Include, but not limited to, owner name, address, telephone number, contact person, date
and duration of work, location, pipe information, and contents handled by pipeline.
3. Supervisory field personnel and historical information of HDD experience.
a. At least one field supervisor listed must be at site when HDD operations are in
progress.
B.
1.4
Submit following:
1. Working Drawings and written procedure describing in detail proposed method and entire
operation for information only including, but not limited to:
a. Size, capacity and arrangement of equipment.
b. Location and size of drilling and receiving pits.
c. Dewatering and methods of removing spoils material. d.
Method of installing detection wire and pipe.
e. Type, location and method of installing locator station.
f. Method of fusion pipe segment and type of equipment.
g. Type of cutting head.
h. Method of monitoring and controlling line and grade.
i. Detection of surface movement.
j. Bentonite drilling mud for information only:
1) Products information, material specifications, and handling procedures.
2) Material safety data sheet and special precautions required.
3) Method of mixing and application.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Complete HDD so as not to interfere with, interrupt, or endanger surface and activity
thereon.
B.
Do not use HDD in rock stratum or subsoil consisting of boulders and underground
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 1 of 6 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
obstructions that impede the process.
C.
PART 2
2.1
Follow applicable ordinances, codes, statutes, rules, and regulations of State of Maryland,
MSHA, applicable County building codes, affected Railroad Company, and applicable
regulations of Federal Government, OSHA 29CFR 1926, and applicable criteria of ANSI
A10.16-1995 (R2001), “Safety Requirements for Tunnels, Shafts, and Caissons.”
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A. Pipe and Fittings.
1. General.
a. Pipe of given size and material by same manufacturer.
b. Clearly mark each pipe length and fitting as required herein.
c. Produced by extrusion process and homogeneous throughout, free from cracks, holes,
foreign inclusions or other defects and uniform in color.
d. Do not use pipe with blisters, bubbles, cuts, or scrapes on inside or outside surfaces,
which damage wall thickness, or other imperfections which impair performance or life of
pipe.
2. PVC.
a. General.
1) Produced from resins following ASTM D1784 for Class 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1, and
PVC 1120.
2) Bearing NSF seal of approval.
3) Markings.
a) Legibly mark pipe at intervals of 5 feet maximum with manufacturer's name or
trademark, pipe size, PVC cell classification, appropriate legend (PVC SDR-21
ASTM D2241), manufacturer's lot number, date of manufacture, and point of
origin.
b) Pipe not marked as specified herein will be rejected.
4) Do not use pipe and fittings manufactured more than 1 year before date of work-site
installation.
b. Solvent cemented joint, pipe and fittings:
1) Approved pipe manufacturers:
a) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Co.
b) Ipex, Inc.
c) Or Equal.
2) Pipe: ASTM D2241, SDR-21 for working pressure of 200 psi or ASTM D1785, Schedule
40. Bell-end pipe: ASTM D2672.
3) Solvent cement: ASTM D2564.
4) 1-1/4-inch PVC couplings for jointing spigot end pipe:
a) Extruded type having beveled entrance.
b) Minimum pressure rating of 200 psi for continuous operation at 73.4 degrees F.
5) Elbows, tees, reducers, and adapters: Minimum pressure rating of 200 psi for
continuous operation at 73.4 degrees F.
6) 1-1/4-inch adaptors: PVC with socket for solvent-cement joint end connections and
female threaded-end connection.
7) Fittings: Manufactured or approved by pipe manufacturer for use and compatible with
their pipe.
c. Gasketed joint, pipe and fittings: Integral bell-end PVC pipe or spigot-end double-bell coupling
PVC pipe, 1-1/2-inch through 4-inch diameter with gasket joints, unless noted otherwise in
Contract Documents.
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 2 of 6 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
1) Approved manufacturers:
a) JM EagleTM.
b) PW Eagle.
c) Ipex, Inc.
d) Diamond Plastics Corporation.
e) Cresline Plastic Pipe Co., Inc.
2) Pipe: ASTM D2241, SDR-21 or ASTM D1785, Schedule 40 for working pressure of 200
psi.
3) Joints: ASTM D3139 for push-on joint pipe.
4) End connections: Able to withstand thermal expansion and contraction at each joint and
resulting in pressure tight seals up to full rating of pipe.
a) Rubber ring gasket: ASTM F477, elastomeric ring suitable for long-term contact
with sewage.
b) Elastomeric gasket lubricant: Supplied by pipe manufacturer or equal.
c) Reference mark: Around entire circumference of pipe on spigot ends indicating
depth spigots shall be inserted into bells or couplings.
(1) Pipe spigot ends: Beveled to permit proper and easy assembly of joint.
5) Couplings for joining spigot end PVC pipe: Furnished by pipe manufacturer.
a) Minimum pressure rating: 200 psi.
b) Insertion depth of spigot end of pipe in coupling: Controlled by internal PVC
mechanical stop in coupling which permits thermal expansion and contraction.
c) Coupling method: Allow for half expansion or contraction of each pipe section to
be taken up at each end of pipe.
6) Fittings:
a) Minimum pressure rating of 200 psi for continuous service at 73.4 degrees F
and compatible with pipe used.
b) Manufactured or approved by pipe manufacturer for use and compatible with
their pipe.
d. Threaded pipe and fittings: When required herein, shown on Drawings, or Standard Details.
1) Pipe with threaded end connections: Schedule 80 PVC pipe meeting requirements of
ASTM D1785 and D2464, approved manufacturers:
a) Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company (1 and 1-1/4 inch only).
b) Or Equal.
2) Thread sealant: Type, which gives watertight seal and permits ease of disassembly.
Use Teflon, Fluoroseal, or similar compounds based on tetra fluoreothylene resins.
3) Fittings: Manufactured or approved by pipe manufacturer for use and compatibility with
pipe.
e. Flanged joint, pipe, and fittings: When required herein, as shown on Drawings, or Standard
Details.
1) Flat face flange: secured by solvent welding and meeting requirements of ANSI B/16.1
Class 125.
2) Fittings: Manufactured or approved by pipe manufacturer for use and compatibility with
their pipe.
3) Flange bolts, nuts, gaskets, and washers: See Section 02510.
3. HDPE Pipe: ASTM D3035 or ASTM F714.
a. General.
1) Material:
a) Material Designation PE3408/PE4710
b) ASTM D3350 cell classification PE445474C or PE445574C.
c) Minimum thermal stability: ASTM D3350.
d) Manufactured in accordance with the following :
(1) 1-1/4 inch through 3 inch Iron Pipe Size (IPS) diameters following
AWWA C901 and ASTM D3035.
(2) 4 inch DIPS diameter following AWWA C906 and ASTM F714.
2) Markings:
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 3 of 6 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
a) Legibly marked in green to identify as sewer pipe at intervals of 5 feet maximum
with manufacturer's name, trademark, pipe size (nominal size and OD base
IPS), PE 3408, SDR-11 appropriate legend such as HDPE, ASTM D3035 or
ASTM F714, date of manufacture, and point of origin.
b) Pipe not marked as specified herein will be rejected.
b. Pipe and fittings, approved manufacturers:
1) CP Chem, Division of Chevron Phillips Chemical Company, LP.
2) Rinker Materials Poly Pipe Division.
3) Or Equal.
c. Pipes: Standard Dimension Ratio (SDR) of 11 with corresponding operating pressure of 160
psi, unless noted otherwise.
d. Fittings: ASTM D3261, use injected molded fittings with ends suitable for Butt fusion unless
otherwise specified.
1) Where fittings are installed in trench, socket fusion, saddle/sidewall fusion and
electrofusion jointing technique fittings may be used instead of Butt fusion fittings, when
approved by Engineer.
2) Socket fusion fittings: ASTM D2683.
3) Saddle/sidewall fusion fittings: ASTM F905.
4) Socket and saddle/sidewall fusion fitting supplied by manufacturer of pipe.
5) Electrofusion fittings supplied by Central Plastics Company or equal.
6) Pressure rating of fittings same as adjacent pipe.
e. Pipe joints:
1) Fusion techniques: Unless otherwise noted, use butt fusion joints between pipes or
fittings.
a) Where jointing of pipe is required in trench, electrofusion or socket fusion
jointing techniques may be used instead of butt fusion jointing technique, when
approved by Engineer.
b) Make electrofusion couplings containing integral heating by computer controlled
automatic electrofusion system, which controls time, temperature, and jointing
pressure for consistent joint.
(1) Couplings rated for same pressure as pipe.
(a) Build-in identification feature to automatically set fusion times
and to include current monitoring feature.
(b) Manufactured by Central Plastics Company or equal.
2) Flange joints: ANSI B/16.1, Class 125 flat face, when required herein
or as shown on Drawings or Standard Details.
a) Pressure rating same as adjacent pipe.
b) Flange joint connection to HDPE pipe:
(1) HDPE flange adapter, supplied by same manufacturer
of pipe with butt fusion jointing technique, ductile iron
backup rings and bolts, gaskets, nuts and washers,
see Section 02510 or,
(2) HDPE by Flange end fitting, 1 piece assembly, with 1
end of HDPE pipe with butt fusion jointing technique
and other end being steel or brass flange as
manufactured by Industrial Pipe Fittings, Inc. or
equal.
(a) Coat steel flanges internally and externally with
fusion bonded epoxy.
3) No threaded or solvent welded/glued HDPE joints permitted.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
DRILL SET-UP AREA
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 4 of 6 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
A. The Contractor is responsible for design and construction of the drill entrance and exit
pits.
3.2
DRILL ENTRANCE AND EXIT PITS
B. Drill entrance and exit pits are required. Maintain at minimum size to allow only the
minimum amount of drilling fluid storage prior to transfer to mud recycling or processing
system or removal from the site.
C. Do not allow drilling mud to flow freely on the site or around the entrance or exit pits.
Remove spilled mud and restore ground to original condition. Provide shore pits in
compliance with OSHA Standards, 29 CFR 1926.652.
3.3
DRILL ENTRANCE AND EXIT ANGLE
A. Ensure entrance and exit angles and elevation profile maintains adequate cover to reduce
risk of drilling fluid breakouts and ground exit occurs as specified herein. Ensure that
entrance and exit angles ensure pullback forces do not exceed 5 percent strain on the
polyethylene pipe.
3.4
PILOT HOLE
A. The type and size of the pilot string cutting head and the diameter of the drill pipe is at the
Contractor's discretion.
1.
Drill the pilot hole along the path shown on the plan and profile drawings.
Pilot hole tolerances are as follows:
a. Vertical Tolerance: Provide minimum cover below channel bottom as specified
on the plans. The Contractor may go deeper if necessary to prevent breakout.
3.5
REAMING
A. Conduct reaming operations at the Contractor's discretion.
Determine the
type of back reamer to be utilized by the type of subsurface soil conditions that are
encountered during the pilot hole drilling operation. The reamer type is at the Contractor's
discretion.
3.6
PULL BACK
A. Fully assemble the entire pipeline to be installed via direction drill prior to
commencement of pull back operations.
Support the pipeline during pullback
operations in a manner to enable it to move freely and prevent damage. Install the
pipeline
in
one
continuous
pull.
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 5 of 6 Upgrade Electrical Systems and Components - Visitor Center Zoological Park(NZP)
OFEO Project No. 1233106
Specifications : Final CD
- 8 August 2013
B. Minimize torsion stress by using a swivel to connect the pull section to the reaming
assembly.
C. Maximum allowable tensile force imposed on the pull section is not to exceed 90 percent
of the pipe manufacturer's safe pull (or tensile) strength. If the pull section is made up of
multiple pipe size or materials, the lowest safe pull strength value governs and the
maximum allowable tensile force is not to exceed 90 percent of this value.
D. Minimize external pressure during installation of the pullback section in the reamed hole.
Replace damaged pipe resulting from external pressure at no cost to the Government.
Buoyancy modification is at the discretion of the Contractor.
3.7
UTILITY LOCATING AND MARKING
A. Locate and clearly mark all utilities prior to start of excavation or drilling. The
Contractor is responsible for damage to utilities, and repairs for such damages, at
no cost to the Government.
3.8
CLEANUP AND FINAL CLOSEOUT
A. Immediately upon completion of work of this section, remove all rubbish and debris from the
job site. Remove all construction equipment and implements of service leaving the entire
area involved in a neat condition acceptable of the [Contracting Officer) [Contract
Administrator).
B. Immediately clean "blow holes" or "breakouts" of drilling fluid to the surface and return the
surface area to its original condition. Dispose of all drilling fluids, soils, and separated
materials in compliance with federal, state, and local environmental regulations.
C. Submit an electronic copy and three hard copies of the record drawings to the [Contracting
in
Officer) [Contract Administrator) within five days after completing the pull back. Include
the record drawings a plan, profile, and all information recorded during the progress of the
work. Clearly tie the record drawings to the project's survey control. Maintain and submit
upon completion signed final work complete logs of guided directional drill operations.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 33 05 23.13 Page 6 of 6